You are on page 1of 320

1997 Lexus LX 450

4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

4.5L 6-CYL

1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION
Engine serial number is stamped on cylinder block. See Fig. 1 .

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE


Engine Code
4.5L 6-Cylinder 1FZ-FE

Fig. 1: Locating Engine Serial Number


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

ADJUSTMENTS
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: Adjust valve clearance with engine cold.


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:56
2:17:50 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

1. Drain cooling system. Disconnect PCV hoses. Remove air intake hose located between throttle body and
airflow meter. Disconnect control cables, coolant hoses, electrical connectors and vacuum hoses at
throttle body. Remove throttle body and gasket.
2. Remove heater coolant valve and engine wiring from firewall for access to valve cover. Remove front and
rear spark plug wire covers from valve cover. Disconnect spark plug wires from spark plugs. Remove
valve cover and gasket.
3. Rotate crankshaft clockwise so timing mark (groove) on crankshaft pulley aligns with "0" mark on timing
chain cover and cylinder No. 1 is at TDC on compression stroke. Ensure timing marks with one dot on
camshaft sprockets are aligned. See Fig. 2 . Timing marks with the 2 dots should be even with cylinder
head surface. See Fig. 2 . If timing marks with one dot are not aligned, rotate crankshaft clockwise one
full revolution (360 degrees).
4. With cylinder No. 1 at TDC, check valve clearance on specified valves. See VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT SEQUENCE . Using feeler gauge, measure and record valve clearance between valve
lifter and camshaft.

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT SEQUENCE


Cylinder No. At Adjust Intake Adjust Exhaust
TDC Valves Valves
1 1, 2 & 4 1, 3 & 5
6 3, 5 & 6 2, 4 & 6

Fig. 2: Checking Camshaft Sprocket Timing Mark Alignment


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

5. To check remaining valves, rotate crankshaft clockwise one full revolution (360 degrees), until cylinder
No. 6 is at TDC on compression stroke. Measure valve clearance on specified valves. See VALVE
CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT SEQUENCE . Valve clearance should be within specification. See
VALVE CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:50 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

VALVE CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application In. (mm)
Intake Valve .006-.010 (.15-.25)
Exhaust Valve .010-.014 (.25-.35)
(1) Adjust valve clearance with engine cold.

NOTE: Manufacturer recommends camshaft removal for access to adjusting shim


for adjusting valve clearance on rear valves on cylinder No. 6. See
CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. On all other cylinders,
valve clearance may be adjusted with camshaft installed.

6. If valve clearance requires adjustment on any valve except rear valves on cylinder No. 6, rotate crankshaft
so camshaft lobe on valve to be adjusted faces upward, away from valve lifter. Rotate valve lifter so notch
on valve lifter is toward spark plug.
7. Valve Clearance Adjuster (SST 09248-55050) is used to remove adjusting shim. Using SST "A" of valve
clearance adjuster, push downward on valve lifter. Place SST "B" between camshaft and valve lifter with
"11" facing proper direction. See Fig. 3 . Remove SST "A".

Fig. 3: Adjusting Valve Clearance


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:50 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

8. On all cylinders, use small screwdriver and magnet to remove adjusting shim. Measure thickness of
adjusting shim removed. Using measured clearance and adjusting shim thickness, determine correct
thickness of replacement adjusting shim. See Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 .
9. Install adjusting shim and camshaft (if removed). Recheck valve clearance. If spark plug tube gasket in
valve cover requires replacement, pry spark plug tube gasket from cylinder head side of valve cover. DO
NOT scratch valve cover sealing surface.
10. Using Handle (SST 09951-07150) and Gasket/Seal Installer(SST 09951-00480), install spark plug tube
gasket in valve cover. Coat spark plug tube gasket sealing area with grease.
11. To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure using NEW gaskets. Tighten bolts/nuts to
specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Fill cooling system. Adjust control cables. Check
ignition timing if distributor was removed.

Fig. 4: Intake Valve Adjusting Shim Selection Chart


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:50 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 5: Exhaust Valve Adjusting Shim Selection Chart


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION

WARNING: Ensure negative battery cable is disconnected at least 90 seconds before


working on vehicle, to prevent air bag deployment.

CAUTION: When battery is disconnected, vehicle computer and memory systems


may lose memory data. Driveability problems may exist until computer
systems have completed a relearn cycle.

NOTE: For reassembly reference, label all electrical connectors, vacuum hoses and
fuel lines before removal. Also place mating marks on engine hood and other
major assemblies before removal.

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1. Disconnect electrical connector for electric fuel pump. See Fig. 6 . Start engine and allow engine to idle
until engine stalls. Turn ignition off. Disconnect negative battery cable.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

2. Reconnect electrical connector for electric fuel pump. Place an approved gasoline container under fuel
line. Cover fuel line connection with shop towel and slowly loosen fuel line to release pressure. Once fuel
pressure is released, fuel system components may be serviced.

Fig. 6: Locating Electrical Connector For Electric Fuel Pump


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

ENGINE

NOTE: Remove engine and transmission as an assembly.

Removal

1. Release fuel pressure. See FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
Drain engine oil and cooling system.
2. Remove battery, battery tray, hood and grille. Remove accessory drive belts. Remove cooling fan, water
pump pulley, fan shroud and radiator. Remove air intake hose with airflow meter and air cleaner cover.
Remove air cleaner case.
3. Disconnect control cables at throttle body. Disconnect necessary electrical connectors, fuel lines, coolant
hoses and vacuum hoses for engine removal. Remove A/C compressor with hoses attached and secure
aside. Remove A/C compressor mounting bracket from cylinder block.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

4. Remove radiator coolant pipe for radiator hose from cylinder block. Disconnect hoses from power
steering pump. Remove heater coolant valve and engine wiring from firewall.
5. Remove glove compartment door. Remove speaker panel from passenger's side of instrument panel, next
to glove compartment door. Remove retaining screw and A/C amplifier. See Fig. 7 .
6. Disconnect electrical connectors from Engine Control Module (ECM). Disconnect remaining 2 electrical
connectors for engine wiring harness. See Fig. 7 . Pull engine wiring harness out through firewall.

Fig. 7: Locating A/C Amplifier, ECM & Engine Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

7. Raise and support vehicle. Remove stabilizer bar. Place reference marks on drive shaft flanges for
installation reference. Remove all drive shafts. Disconnect transmission shift linkage at control rod on
transmission.
8. Remove knob from transfer case shift lever. Remove center console panel located above transmission and
transfer case shift levers. Remove boot from transfer case shift lever. Remove center console storage box
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

located between seats.


9. Disconnect electrical connectors at transmission shift lever assembly. Remove transmission shift lever
assembly. Disconnect control rod at transfer case shift lever. Remove transfer case shift lever.
10. Disconnect necessary electrical connectors at transmission and transfer case. Disconnect oil cooler lines
at transmission. Disconnect front exhaust pipe with front catalytic converter from exhaust manifold and
rear catalytic converter on center exhaust pipe.
11. Remove transfer case skid plates. Support transmission with floor jack. Remove transmission
crossmember located below transmission. Support engine with hoist. Remove engine mount-to-frame
nuts. Lift engine and transmission from vehicle.

Installation

1. To install, reverse removal procedure using NEW gaskets. If installing torque converter bolts, ensure the
Green-colored bolt is installed first. Tighten bolts/nuts to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . Ensure reference marks on drive shaft flanges are aligned.
2. To adjust shift linkage for transmission, place transmission shift lever in Neutral. Rotate control rod on
transmission fully backward, toward rear of vehicle. Move control rod forward 2 notches to Neutral
position. Install transmission shift linkage on control rod. Install and tighten transmission shift linkage-to-
control rod nut to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
3. When installing stabilizer bar, loosely install stabilizer-to-axle housing bolts. Install and tighten stabilizer
bar mount-to-frame bolts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Lower vehicle. Bounce
vehicle up and down several times. Tighten stabilizer bar-to-axle housing bolts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install remaining components.

CYLINDER HEAD & MANIFOLDS

Removal

1. Release fuel pressure. See FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
Drain cooling system. Remove battery and battery tray. Remove PCV hoses. Remove air intake hose with
airflow meter and air cleaner cover. Disconnect control cables and electrical connectors at throttle body.
2. Disconnect necessary electrical connectors, coolant hoses and vacuum hoses for removal of cylinder head
and manifolds. Remove heater coolant valve and engine wiring from firewall. Remove spark plug wire
covers from valve cover. See Fig. 8 . Disconnect spark plug wires from spark plugs. Remove distributor
and plug wires. Remove power steering reservoir with hoses attached and secure aside.
3. Remove accessory drive belts and generator. Remove throttle body and gasket. Remove dipstick, dipstick
tube and "O" ring for engine oil and transmission fluid. Remove air intake chamber support brace located
between cylinder block and air intake chamber.
4. Disconnect fuel inlet hose at fuel filter. Remove coolant by-pass pipe from front of cylinder head. See
Fig. 8 . Disconnect front exhaust pipe with front catalytic converter from exhaust manifold and rear
catalytic converter on center exhaust pipe.
5. Remove heat insulators, No. 1 and 2 exhaust manifolds and gaskets from cylinder head. Remove heater
coolant pipe from exhaust manifold side of cylinder head. See Fig. 8 .
6. Remove coolant by-pass outlet, coolant by-pass outlet pipe and "O" rings from passenger's side front
corner of cylinder head. See Fig. 8 . Remove valve cover and gasket. See Fig. 10 . Remove spark plugs.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Remove camshafts. See CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.

Fig. 8: Exploded View Of Intake Manifold & Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

CAUTION: Cylinder head bolts must be removed in proper sequence to prevent


cylinder head warpage.

7. Remove 2 cylinder head-to-timing chain cover bolts. Remove cylinder head bolts in sequence using
several steps. See Fig. 9 . Remove cylinder head and cylinder head gasket. If removing valve lifters and
adjusting shims from cylinder head, ensure component location is marked for installation reference.
8. Remove generator mounting bracket, coolant outlet and gasket from cylinder head. Remove EGR pipe
from EGR valve. Remove coolant by-pass hose from cylinder head, at rear of intake manifold.
9. Remove intake manifold bolts/nuts. Remove intake manifold with air intake chamber from cylinder head.
Disconnect vacuum hose from fuel pressure regulator. Remove air intake chamber.
10. If removing delivery pipe with fuel injectors from intake manifold, remove fuel return pipe from fuel
pressure regulator and intake manifold. See Fig. 8 . Remove union bolts, gaskets and No. 1 fuel pipe from
delivery pipe and fuel filter.

CAUTION: DO NOT allow fuel injectors to fall from delivery pipe when removing
delivery pipe.

11. Remove delivery pipe-to-intake manifold bolts and delivery pipe with fuel injectors. Remove 3 spacers
and 6 insulators for delivery pipe from intake manifold. See Fig. 11 . Remove fuel injectors from delivery
pipe.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 9: Cylinder Head-To-Cylinder Block Bolt Removal & Installation Sequence


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Cylinder Head & Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 11: Locating Insulators & Spacers For Delivery Pipe


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Inspection

1. Inspect cylinder head warpage at cylinder block and manifold areas. Replace cylinder head if warpage
exceeds specification. See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Using caliper, measure outside diameter of cylinder head bolts on threaded area at 1.18" (30.0 mm) for
bottom end of bolt. Replace cylinder head bolt if outside diameter is less than .417" (10.60 mm).
3. Inspect intake manifold-to-air intake chamber surface and intake manifold-to-cylinder head surface for
warpage. Inspect air intake chamber-to-intake manifold surface for warpage. Inspect exhaust manifold-to-
cylinder head surface for warpage. Replace any manifold if warpage exceeds .0118" (.300 mm).
4. Inspect cylinder block deck surface for warpage. Replace cylinder block if deck surface warpage exceeds
specification. See CYLINDER BLOCK under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
5. Ensure valve lifter diameter, bore diameter and oil clearance is within specification. See VALVE
LIFTERS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS. Replace components if not within specification.
6. Inspect camshaft and components. See CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Ensure
cylinder block orifice is installed in cylinder block is not damaged or restricted. See Fig. 37 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Installation

1. If installing fuel injector in delivery pipe, remove "O" ring and grommet from fuel injector. Apply light
coat of gasoline to NEW "O" ring for fuel injector. Install NEW grommet and "O" ring on fuel injector.
Using twisting motion, install fuel injector into delivery pipe.
2. Install NEW insulators and spacers on intake manifold. See Fig. 11 . Install fuel injectors with delivery
pipe on intake manifold. Loosely install delivery pipe-to-intake manifold bolts. Ensure fuel injectors
rotate smoothly. If fuel injectors fail to rotate smoothly, check for improperly installed "O" rings. Position
each fuel injector so electrical connector is facing upward. Tighten delivery pipe-to-intake manifold bolts
to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
3. Install fuel return pipe on fuel pressure regulator and intake manifold. Using NEW gaskets, install No. 1
fuel pipe between delivery pipe and fuel filter. Install and tighten union bolts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
4. Using NEW gaskets, install air intake chamber on intake manifold. Install and tighten air intake chamber
bolts/nuts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
5. Install NEW intake manifold gasket on cylinder head with rear identification mark toward rear of cylinder
head. See Fig. 12 . Install intake manifold. Install and tighten intake manifold-to-cylinder head bolts/nuts
to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

Fig. 12: Installing Intake Manifold Gasket


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

6. Install heater coolant pipe. Tighten bolts/nuts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
Using NEW gasket, install EGR pipe on cylinder head and EGR valve. Install and tighten bolts and EGR
pipe union nut to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
7. Using NEW gasket, install coolant outlet on cylinder head. Install and tighten nuts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install generator mounting bracket on cylinder head. Install and tighten
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

bolts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .


8. Ensure cylinder block orifice is installed in cylinder block. See Fig. 37 . Apply Sealant (08826-00080) on
front corners of cylinder block. See Fig. 13 . Install NEW cylinder head gasket on cylinder block. Ensure
all holes in cylinder head gasket align with holes in cylinder block.
9. Install cylinder head. Apply engine oil on cylinder head bolt threads and cylinder head bolt-to-cylinder
head contact surfaces. Ensure washers are installed on cylinder head bolts.
10. Install and tighten cylinder head-to-cylinder block bolts to specification in sequence. See Fig. 9 . See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install and tighten cylinder head-to-timing chain cover bolts to
specification.
11. Install camshafts using proper procedure. See CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
Check and adjust valve clearance. See VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT under
ADJUSTMENTS.
12. Install and tighten spark plugs to specification. Apply sealant on half-circular plug where it contacts
cylinder head. Install half-circular plugs at front of cylinder head. See Fig. 10 .
13. Rotate crankshaft clockwise so cylinder No. 1 is at TDC of compression stroke. Ensure timing mark
(groove) on crankshaft pulley aligns with "0" mark on timing chain cover.
14. Ensure timing marks with one dot on camshaft sprockets are aligned. See Fig. 2 . Timing marks with the
2 dots should be even with cylinder head surface. See Fig. 2 . If timing marks with one dot are not
aligned, rotate crankshaft clockwise one full revolution (360 degrees).
15. If spark plug tube gasket in valve cover requires replacement, pry spark plug tube gasket from valve
cover. DO NOT scratch valve cover sealing surface.
16. Using Handle (SST 09951-07150) and Gasket/Seal Installer (SST 09951-00480), install spark plug tube
gasket in valve cover. Coat spark plug tube gasket sealing area with grease. Using NEW gasket, install
valve cover.
17. To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Use NEW gaskets or "O" rings. Apply
soapy water solution to coolant by-pass outlet pipe "O" rings before installing coolant by-pass outlet pipe.
Apply engine oil to dipstick tube "O" rings before installing. Tighten all bolts/nuts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
18. When installing distributor, ensure cylinder No. 1 is at TDC on compression stroke. Ensure timing mark
(groove) on crankshaft pulley aligns with "0" mark on timing chain cover.
19. Install NEW "O" ring on distributor. Apply engine oil on "O" ring. Align protrusion on drive gear with
groove on distributor housing. See Fig. 14 . Install distributor in cylinder head so center of flange on
distributor aligns with bolt hole in cylinder head. Install distributor hold-down bolt.
20. To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Tighten all bolts/nuts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Adjust control cables and ignition timing. Fill cooling system. Check
all fluid levels.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 13: Applying Sealant On Cylinder Block


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 14: Installing Distributor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CRANKSHAFT FRONT SEAL

Removal & Installation (Timing Chain Cover Installed)

Remove accessory drive belts. Using Pulley Holder (SST 09213-58012) and Handle (SST 09330-00021), hold
crankshaft pulley. Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Using puller, remove crankshaft pulley. Pry seal from timing
chain cover. DO NOT damage sealing surfaces.

Installation

To install, apply grease to seal lip of NEW seal. Using hammer, Handle (SST 09316-00011) and Seal Installer
(SST 09316-00051), install seal until seal surface is even with timing chain cover. To install remaining
components, reverse removal procedure. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .

Removal & Installation (Timing Chain Cover Removed)

Using hammer and punch, tap seal from timing chain cover. DO NOT damage sealing surfaces. To install,
apply grease to seal lip of NEW seal. Using hammer, Handle (SST 09316-00011) and Seal Installer (SST
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

09316-00051), install seal until seal surface is even with timing chain cover.

TIMING CHAIN

NOTE: Manufacturer recommends cylinder head removal when servicing timing chain,
as cylinder head gasket fits on top of timing chain cover.

Removal

1. Drain cooling system and engine oil. Remove lower engine cover. Remove accessory drive belts. Remove
cooling fan, water pump pulley, shroud and radiator.
2. Remove A/C compressor with hoses attached and secure aside. Remove A/C compressor bracket from
cylinder block. Remove radiator coolant pipe and hose from cylinder block. See Fig. 15 . Remove
bolts/nuts, water pump and gasket. Remove cylinder head. See CYLINDER HEAD & MANIFOLDS
under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Remove No. 1 and 2 oil pans. See OIL PAN under REMOVAL
& INSTALLATION.
3. Using Pulley Holder (SST 09213-58012) and Handle (SST 09330-00021), hold crankshaft pulley.
Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Using puller, remove crankshaft pulley.

NOTE: Oil pump drive shaft gear thrust clearance must be checked before
removing timing chain cover.

4. Using dial indicator, check oil pump drive shaft gear thrust clearance when moving gear back and forth.
See Fig. 16 . Standard oil pump drive shaft gear thrust clearance is .0016-.0063" (.040-.160 mm) with
maximum thrust clearance of .0118" (.300 mm). Replace oil pump drive shaft gear and or/timing chain
cover if thrust clearance exceeds maximum specification.
5. Remove drive belt idler pulley and drive belt adjusting bar. See Fig. 15 . Remove bolts from timing chain
cover. Note bolt length and location for installation reference. Remove timing chain cover by gently
prying between cylinder block and timing chain cover.
6. Remove "O" rings from rear of timing chain cover. Remove timing chain and camshaft sprocket. Remove
crankshaft sprocket, damper and slipper. See Fig. 15 .
7. Remove bolt and oil jet from front of cylinder block. Remove crankshaft rotor and oil pump drive shaft
gear. See Fig. 15 . If removing pump drive shaft gear, place shop towels against block. Using 2
screwdrivers, pry pump drive shaft gear from crankshaft.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Oil Pans, Timing Chain & Components
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 16: Checking Oil Pump Drive Shaft Gear Thrust Clearance
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Inspection

1. Inspect components for damage. Apply air pressure to oil jet to ensure passage is not restricted. Using
micrometer, check amount of wear on slipper and damper. Replace slipper or damper if wear
exceeds .039" (1.00 mm) from original surface.
2. Using caliper, measure length of timing chain between 16 links at several different areas on timing chain.
Perform STEP 1. See Fig. 17 . Replace timing chain if length exceeds specification. See TIMING
CHAIN & SPROCKET SPECIFICATIONS .
3. Wrap timing chain around crankshaft sprocket. Using caliper, measure outside diameter of timing chain
with caliper contacting rollers on timing chain. Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 17 .
4. Repeat procedure on camshaft sprocket. Replace timing chain and sprocket if outside diameter
measurement is less than specified. See TIMING CHAIN & SPROCKET SPECIFICATIONS .

TIMING CHAIN & SPROCKET SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Sprocket & Timing Chain Outside Diameter
Timing Chain With Camshaft Sprocket 4.961 (126.00)
Timing Chain With Crankshaft Sprocket 2.575 (65.40)
Timing Chain Length Between 16 Links 5.772 (146.60)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 17: Measuring Timing Chain & Sprockets


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Installation

1. If installing crankshaft front seal in timing chain cover, use hammer, Handle (SST 09316-00011) and Seal
Installer (SST 09316-00051). Install seal until seal surface is even with timing chain cover. Apply grease
to seal lip of seal.
2. If installing pump drive shaft gear on crankshaft, rotate crankshaft until key in crankshaft is facing
downward. Install pump drive shaft gear on crankshaft. If installing oil pump drive shaft gear, apply
engine oil to splines at center of gear where shaft of oil pump drive rotor engages. Install oil pump drive
shaft gear.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

CAUTION: Ensure crankshaft rotor is installed with flat side toward cylinder
block. See Fig. 15 .

3. Install crankshaft rotor with flat side of crankshaft rotor toward cylinder block. See Fig. 15 . Install oil jet
on cylinder block. Install and tighten bolt to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install
damper and slipper. Install and tighten bolts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
Ensure slipper moves smoothly.

CAUTION: Ensure crankshaft sprocket is installed with flat side toward cylinder
block. See Fig. 15 .

4. Install crankshaft sprocket with flat side toward cylinder block and crankshaft rotor. See Fig. 15 . If
necessary, use hammer and Sprocket Installer (SST 09636-20010) to install crankshaft sprocket.
5. Install timing chain. Align bright link on timing chain with timing mark on camshaft sprocket. Perform
STEP 1. See Fig. 18 . Align bright link on timing chain with timing mark on crankshaft sprocket. Perform
STEP 2. See Fig. 18 .
6. Place tie around timing chain to ensure timing chain does not come loose. Perform STEP 3. See Fig. 18 .
Ensure sealing surfaces on front of cylinder block and rear of timing chain cover are clean. Apply sealant
on rear of timing chain cover. Ensure sealant does not enter "O" ring areas on timing chain cover. See
Fig. 19 .

CAUTION: When installing timing chain cover, ensure splines on oil pump drive
rotor of oil pump in timing chain cover fully engage with oil pump
drive shaft gear or components may be damaged.

7. Install NEW "O" rings on rear of timing chain cover. Install timing chain cover on cylinder block. Engage
splines on oil pump drive rotor with oil pump drive shaft gear. Install drive belt adjusting bar and
bolts/nuts of timing chain cover. Ensure proper length bolt is installed in designated area. See Fig. 20 .
Tighten bolts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Remove tie from timing chain.
8. Install drive belt idler pulley and crankshaft pulley. Install and tighten bolts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install No. 1 and 2 oil pans using proper procedure. See OIL PAN
under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
9. Install cylinder head using proper procedure. See CYLINDER HEAD under REMOVAL &
INSTALLATION . To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Tighten bolts/nuts to
specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Fill crankcase and cooling system.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 18: Installing Timing Chain


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 19: Identifying Timing Chain Cover Sealant Application Areas


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 20: Identifying Timing Chain Cover Bolt Length


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

VALVE LIFTER

Removal

Camshaft must be removed for valve lifter removal. See CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL &
INSTALLATION. Note location of adjusting shims and valve lifters for installation reference. Remove valve
lifters and adjusting shims from cylinder head.

Inspection

Inspect components for damage. Ensure valve lifter diameter, bore diameter and oil clearance are within
specification. See VALVE LIFTERS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Installation

To install, reverse removal procedure. Coat components with engine oil before installing. Ensure components
are installed in original location and valve lifter rotates smoothly in cylinder head. If camshaft, adjusting shims
or valve lifters are replaced, check valve clearance. See VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT under
ADJUSTMENTS.

CAMSHAFTS

Removal

1. Drain cooling system. Disconnect PCV hoses. Remove air intake hose located between throttle body and
airflow meter. Disconnect control cables, coolant hoses, electrical connectors and vacuum hoses at
throttle body. Remove throttle body and gasket.
2. Remove heater coolant valve and engine wiring from firewall for access to valve cover. Remove front and
rear spark plug wire covers from valve cover. Disconnect spark plug wires from spark plugs. Remove
valve cover and gasket.
3. Rotate crankshaft clockwise so timing mark (groove) on crankshaft pulley aligns with "0" mark on timing
chain cover and cylinder No. 1 is at TDC on compression stroke. Ensure timing marks with one dot on
camshaft sprockets are aligned. See Fig. 2 . Timing marks with the 2 dots should be even with cylinder
head surface. See Fig. 2 . If timing marks with one dot are not aligned, rotate crankshaft clockwise one
full revolution (360 degrees).
4. Remove nuts, timing chain tensioner and gasket from cylinder head. See Fig. 10 . Remove half-circular
plug from front of cylinder head. Place reference mark on timing chain and camshaft sprocket for
installation reference.
5. Hold intake camshaft by placing wrench on hexagonal portion of camshaft. Remove camshaft sprocket
bolt and distributor gear. See Fig. 10 . Remove camshaft sprocket with timing chain, allowing camshaft
sprocket and timing chain to rest on slipper and damper. See Fig. 15 .

CAUTION: DO NOT allow timing chain to disengage from crankshaft sprocket.

NOTE: Camshaft bearing caps are numbered for location. No. 1 bearing cap is at
timing chain end of cylinder head and No. 7 at rear of cylinder head.
Camshaft bearing caps are stamped with an "I" for intake camshaft or "E"
for exhaust camshaft. Arrow on camshaft bearing cap points toward
timing chain end of cylinder head.

CAUTION: Camshafts must be properly positioned to lift camshaft straight from


cylinder head to prevent damage to cylinder head and camshaft. DO
NOT pry or force camshafts from cylinder head as component
damage may result.

6. For exhaust camshaft removal, use wrench on hexagonal portion of camshaft to rotate exhaust camshaft
for access to service bolt hole on sub-gear. Secure sub-gear on exhaust camshaft to main gear using a 6 x
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

1 x 18-mm service bolt "B". See Fig. 21 . Before removing camshaft bearing cap bolts, ensure torsional
spring force of sub-gear is held by service bolt "B".

Fig. 21: Securing Sub-Gear On Exhaust Camshaft


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

7. Rotate intake camshaft to position timing mark with 2 dots at a 35-degree angle. Perform STEP 1. See
Fig. 22 . Lightly push exhaust camshaft toward rear of cylinder head.
8. Alternately loosen bolts on No. 1 exhaust camshaft bearing cap. Remove No. 1 exhaust camshaft bearing
cap. Alternately loosen and remove No. 2, 3, 5 and 7 exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts. DO NOT loosen
No. 4 and 6 exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts. Remove No. 2, 3, 5 and 7 exhaust camshaft bearing caps.
9. Alternately loosen No. 4 and 6 exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts. Ensure camshaft is lifted upward
evenly as No. 4 and 6 exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts are removed. Remove No. 4 and 6 exhaust
camshaft bearing caps and exhaust camshaft.

NOTE: If exhaust camshaft is not lifted upward evenly, retighten No. 4 and 6
exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts. Reinstall all exhaust camshaft
bearing caps and reposition timing mark. Repeat procedure and remove
exhaust camshaft.

10. For intake camshaft removal, rotate intake camshaft so timing mark with 2 dots is at 25-degree angle.
Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 22 . This aids in camshaft removal by using lobes on cylinder No. 1 and 4 to
push on valve lifters.
11. Lightly push intake camshaft toward front of cylinder head. Alternately loosen bolts on No. 1 intake
camshaft bearing cap. Remove No. 1 intake camshaft bearing cap.
12. Alternately loosen and remove No. 3, 4, 6 and 7 intake camshaft bearing cap bolts. DO NOT loosen No. 2
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

and 5 intake camshaft bearing cap bolts. Remove No. 3, 4, 6 and 7 intake camshaft bearing caps.
13. Alternately loosen No. 2 and 5 intake camshaft bearing cap bolts. Ensure intake camshaft is lifted upward
evenly as No. 2 and 5 camshaft bearing caps bolts are removed. Remove No. 2 and 5 intake camshaft
bearing caps and intake camshaft.

NOTE: If intake camshaft is not lifted upward evenly, retighten No. 2 and 5 intake
camshaft bearing cap bolts. Reinstall all intake camshaft bearing caps and
reposition timing mark. Repeat procedure and remove intake camshaft.

14. If removing sub-gear from exhaust camshaft, install service bolt "A" in camshaft. See Fig. 23 . Using
screwdriver, rotate sub-gear clockwise and remove service bolt "B". Remove snap ring, wave washer,
sub-gear and camshaft gear spring from exhaust camshaft. See Fig. 10 .
15. Remove valve lifters and adjusting shims from cylinder head (if necessary). Mark component location for
installation reference as components must be installed in original location.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 22: Positioning Camshaft Timing Marks For Servicing Of Camshafts


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 23: Disassembling Exhaust Camshaft Gears


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Inspection

1. Check camshaft journal diameter, lobe height and journal runout. Replace camshaft if not within
specification. See CAMSHAFT under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

CAUTION: When installing camshaft to check oil clearance, camshaft end play
and gear backlash, proper installation procedure of camshaft must
be followed. See INSTALLATION under CAMSHAFTS .

2. Install camshaft in cylinder head. Using Plastigage, check camshaft oil clearance with camshaft bearing
cap bolts tightened to specification. Check camshaft end play with camshaft bearing cap bolts tightened to
specification. Replace camshaft and/or cylinder head if oil clearance or camshaft end play clearance is not
within specification. See CAMSHAFT under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
3. Install camshafts in cylinder head without sub-gear installed on exhaust camshaft. Tighten camshaft
bearing cap bolts to specification. Using dial indicator, measure gear backlash between camshaft gears.
Replace camshaft if gear backlash exceeds specification. See CAMSHAFT under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS.
4. Measure distance between ends of camshaft gear spring. Replace camshaft gear spring if distance is
not .717-.740" (18.20-18.80 mm). Hold timing chain tensioner and push plunger inward. Ensure plunger
moves smoothly inward and outward. Replace timing chain tensioner if plunger does not move smoothly.

Installation
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

1. For reassembly of exhaust camshaft, install camshaft gear spring, sub-gear, wave washer and snap ring on
exhaust camshaft. Ensure pins on sub-gear and main gear engage with ends of camshaft gear spring.
2. Install service bolt "A" in camshaft sub-gear. See Fig. 23 . Using screwdriver, rotate sub-gear clockwise.
Align holes of main gear and sub-gear. Install service bolt "B". Remove service bolt "A".
3. Coat thrust surfaces of camshafts with engine oil. To install intake camshaft, position intake camshaft so
cylinder No. 1 and 4 camshaft lobes are facing downward, toward valve lifter. This will place timing
mark with 2 dots on intake camshaft at a 25-degree angle. Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 22 . Install intake
camshaft on cylinder head.

CAUTION: Ensure intake camshaft bearing caps are stamped with letter "I" and
installed in numerical sequence with arrow pointing toward timing
chain end of cylinder head. No. 1 camshaft bearing cap should be at
front of cylinder head and No. 7 at rear of cylinder head.

4. Lightly push intake camshaft toward timing chain end of cylinder head. Install No. 2 and 5 camshaft
bearing caps on intake camshaft. Install bolts in No. 2 and 5 camshaft bearing caps. Alternately tighten
bolts until No. 2 and 5 camshaft bearing caps are snug against cylinder head.
5. Install No. 3, 4, 6 and 7 camshaft bearing caps and bolts on intake camshaft. Alternately tighten bolts
until No. 3, 4, 6 and 7 camshaft bearing caps are snug against cylinder head.
6. Install No. 1 camshaft bearing cap and bolts on intake camshaft. Ensure no gap exists between No. 1
camshaft bearing cap and surface of cylinder head. Alternately tighten bolts until No. 1 camshaft bearing
cap is snug against cylinder head surface. Tighten all intake camshaft bearing cap bolts to specification
starting at the center of camshaft and moving outward. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
7. To install exhaust camshaft, rotate intake camshaft until timing mark with 2 dots is at 35-degree angle.
Perform STEP 1. See Fig. 22 . Engage gear on exhaust camshaft with gear on intake camshaft so timing
marks with the 2 dots are aligned. See Fig. 24 . Roll exhaust camshaft onto cylinder head. Ensure timing
marks with the 2 dots are still aligned.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 24: Aligning Timing Marks On Camshaft Gears


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CAUTION: Ensure exhaust camshaft bearing caps are stamped with letter "E"
and installed in numerical sequence with arrow pointing toward
timing chain end of cylinder head. No. 1 camshaft bearing cap should
be at front of cylinder head and No. 7 at rear of cylinder head.

8. Lightly push exhaust camshaft toward timing chain end of cylinder head. Install No. 4 and 6 camshaft
bearing caps on exhaust camshaft. Install bolts in No. 4 and 6 camshaft bearing caps on exhaust camshaft.
Alternately tighten bolts until No. 4 and 6 camshaft bearing caps are snug against cylinder head surface.
9. Install No. 2, 3, 5 and 7 camshaft bearing caps and bolts on exhaust camshaft. Alternately tighten bolts
until No. 2, 3, 5 and 7 camshaft bearing caps are snug against cylinder head surface.
10. Install No. 1 camshaft bearing cap and bolts on exhaust camshaft. Ensure no gap exists between No. 1
camshaft bearing cap and surface of cylinder head. Alternately tighten bolts until No. 1 camshaft bearing
cap is snug against cylinder head surface.
11. Tighten all exhaust camshaft bearing cap bolts to specification starting at the center of camshaft and
moving outward. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Remove service bolt "B" from exhaust camshaft.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 32 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

CAUTION: Ensure service bolt "B" is removed from exhaust camshaft.

12. Ensure cylinder No. 1 is at TDC of compression stroke and timing mark (groove) on crankshaft pulley
aligns with "0" mark on timing chain cover. Rotate camshafts so timing marks with one dot on camshaft
sprockets are aligned. See Fig. 2 . Timing marks with the 2 dots should be even with cylinder head
surface.
13. Ensure reference mark on camshaft sprocket and timing chain are aligned. Install camshaft sprocket on
intake camshaft. Ensure groove in camshaft sprocket engages pin in camshaft.
14. Install distributor gear on camshaft sprocket. Ensure pin on distributor gear engages groove on camshaft
sprocket. Install and tighten camshaft sprocket bolt to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .
15. Install NEW gasket for timing chain tensioner on cylinder head. Ensure gasket is properly positioned on
cylinder head with front mark toward front of cylinder head. See Fig. 25 . Install timing chain tensioner
on cylinder head. Push timing chain, against cylinder head. Install and tighten nuts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

Fig. 25: Installing Gasket For Timing Chain Tensioner


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

16. To check for proper valve timing, rotate crankshaft clockwise so cylinder No. 1 is at TDC of compression

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 33 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

stroke. Ensure timing mark (groove) on crankshaft pulley aligns with "0" mark on timing chain cover.
17. Ensure timing marks with one dot on camshaft sprockets are aligned. See Fig. 2 . Timing marks with the
2 dots should be even with cylinder head surface. See Fig. 2 . If timing marks with one dot are not
aligned, rotate crankshaft clockwise one full revolution (360 degrees), and recheck alignment.
18. Adjust valve clearance. See VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT under ADJUSTMENTS. If spark
plug tube gasket in valve cover requires replacement, pry spark plug tube gasket from valve cover. DO
NOT scratch valve cover sealing surface.
19. Using Handle (SST 09951-07150) and Gasket/Seal Installer(SST 09951-00480), install spark plug tube
gasket in valve cover. Coat spark plug tube gasket sealing area with grease.
20. Apply sealant on half-circular plug where it contacts cylinder head and install in cylinder head. See Fig.
10 . To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Use NEW gaskets. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . Fill cooling system. Adjust control cables.

CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

NOTE: A one-piece crankshaft rear oil seal is mounted in rear oil seal housing on rear
of cylinder block.

Removal & Installation

1. Remove transmission and drive plate. See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL & INSTALLATION - A/T
article in AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERVICING.
 TRANSMISSION REMOVAL & INSTALLATION - A/T - Lexus

 TRANSMISSION REMOVAL & INSTALLATION - A/T - Toyota

Using knife, cut seal lip from crankshaft rear oil seal. Pry crankshaft rear oil seal from rear oil seal
housing. DO NOT damage rear oil seal housing and crankshaft surfaces.

2. To install, use Handle (SST 09951-07150) and Oil Seal Installer(SST 09223-15030) to install NEW
crankshaft rear oil seal in rear oil seal housing until oil seal is even with surface of rear oil seal housing.
Coat lip of crankshaft rear oil seal with grease.
3. To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Tighten drive plate bolts to specification in
a crisscross pattern. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

WATER PUMP

Removal & Installation

1. Drain cooling system. Disconnect necessary coolant hoses for access to water pump. Remove accessory
drive belts. Remove cooling fan, water pump pulley and fan shroud. Remove bolts/nuts, water pump and
gasket.
2. To install, reverse removal procedure using NEW gasket. Tighten bolts/nuts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Fill cooling system.

OIL PAN
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 34 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

NOTE: Oil pan consists of a No. 1 and No. 2 oil pan. See Fig. 15 .

Removal

1. Raise and support vehicle. Drain engine oil. Remove lower engine cover for access to oil pans (if
necessary). Disconnect oil cooler pipe bracket. Remove bolts, oil level sensor and gasket from No. 1 oil
pan. See Fig. 15 .
2. To remove No. 2 oil pan, remove No. 2 oil pan bolts/nuts. Install Seal Cutter (SST 09032-00100) between
No. 1 and 2 oil pans. Using hammer, tap seal cutter along sides of No. 2 oil pan surface to loosen seal
between No. 1 and 2 oil pans. DO NOT damage sealing surfaces. Remove No. 2 oil pan.
3. To remove No. 1 oil pan, remove No. 1 oil pan-to-transmission housing bolts located at rear of oil pan.
Remove remaining No. 1 oil pan bolt/nuts. Remove No. 1 oil pan by prying between oil pan and cylinder
block at designated areas. See Fig. 26 .
4. Remove oil pump passage gasket located between No. 1 oil pan and timing chain cover. See Fig. 27 .
Remove oil pan baffle plate and oil pump pick-up tube from No. 1 oil pan (if necessary).

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 35 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 26: Removing No. 1 Oil Pan


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 36 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 27: Locating Oil Pump Passage & Oil Pump Passage Gasket
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Installation

1. Using NEW gasket, install oil pump pick-up tube on No. 1 oil pan (if removed). Tighten bolt/nuts to
specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install oil pan baffle plate on No. 1 oil pan (if
removed). Tighten bolt/nuts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Ensure all sealing
surfaces are clean.
2. Install NEW oil pump passage gasket on timing chain cover. Pour .5 oz. engine oil in oil pump passage of
timing chain cover. See Fig. 27 . Apply a .12-.16" (3.0-4.0 mm) diameter bead of sealant at specified
areas on No. 1 oil pan. See Fig. 28 .
3. Install No. 1 oil pan. Install and tighten bolt/nuts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
Apply a .12-.16" (3.0-4.0 mm) diameter bead of sealant at specified areas on No. 2 oil pan. See Fig. 28 .
4. Install No. 2 oil pan. Install and tighten bolt/nuts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
To install remaining components, reverse removal procedure. Tighten bolts/nuts to specification.
5. Use NEW gasket when installing oil level sensor. Ensure gasket is installed on oil level sensor with flat
side against oil level sensor and cupped side toward No. 1 oil pan. Fill crankcase with oil.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 37 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 28: Locating No. 1 & 2 Oil Pan Sealant Application Areas
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OVERHAUL
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 38 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

CYLINDER HEAD

Cylinder Head

1. Inspect cylinder head warpage at cylinder block and manifold surfaces. Replace cylinder head if warpage
exceeds specification. See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Using Plastigage, check camshaft oil clearance with camshaft installed using proper procedure. See
CAMSHAFTS under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Check camshaft end play with camshaft bearing
cap bolts tightened to specification. Replace camshaft and/or cylinder head if camshaft oil clearance or
end play is not within specification. See CAMSHAFT under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
3. Ensure valve lifter diameter, bore diameter and oil clearance are within specification. See VALVE
LIFTERS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
4. If installing spark plug tube into cylinder head, apply Sealant (08833-00070) on spark plug tube bore in
cylinder head. Using press, press spark plug tube into cylinder head until distance from top surface of
spark plug tube to camshaft bearing cap surface of cylinder head is 1.791" (45.50 mm).

Valve Springs

Ensure valve spring free length, pressure and out-of-square are within specification. See VALVES & VALVE
SPRINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Valve Stem Oil Seals

Different style valve stem oil seals are used for intake and exhaust valves. See Fig. 29 . Lubricate valve stem oil
seal with engine oil. Using Oil Seal Installer (SST 09236-15010), install valve stem oil seal.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 39 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 29: Identifying Valve Stem Oil Seals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Valve Guides

1. Ensure valve guide inside diameter is within specification. See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Replace valve guide if inside diameter exceeds specification.
2. To replace valve guide, heat cylinder head to 176-212°F (80-100°C). Using hammer and Valve Guide
Remover/Installer (SST 09201-01070), drive valve guide out from cylinder block side of cylinder head.
3. Measure cylinder head valve guide bore inside diameter. If bore inside diameter is .4524-.4533" (11.492-
11.513 mm), use standard valve guide. If bore inside diameter is .4544-.4552" (11.542-11.563 mm), use
oversize valve guide.
4. If bore inside diameter exceeds .4533" (11.513 mm), machine valve guide bore to .4544-.4552" (11.542-
11.563 mm) for oversize valve guide. If bore I.D. exceeds .4552" (11.563 mm), replace cylinder head.
5. To install valve guide, heat cylinder head to 176-212°F (80-100°C). Use hammer and valve guide
remover/installer to install valve guide. Install valve guide until valve guide installed height is within
specification. See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS. Valve guide installed height
is measured from top of valve guide to cylinder head surface. See Fig. 30 .
6. Using .275" (7.00 mm) reamer, ream valve guide to obtain specified valve stem-to-guide oil clearance.
See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 40 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 30: Measuring Valve Guide Installed Height


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Valve Seat

Ensure valve seat angle and seat width are within specification. See CYLINDER HEAD under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Valve seat replacement information is not available.

Valves

Ensure minimum refinish length, stem diameter and valve margin are within specification. See VALVES &
VALVE SPRINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Valve Seat Correction Angles

Use 30-degree and 45-degree stones to lower valve seat contact area. Use 75-degree and 45-degree stones to
raise valve seat contact area.

VALVE TRAIN

Valve Lifters

Ensure valve lifter diameter, bore diameter and oil clearance are within specification. See VALVE LIFTERS
under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 41 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY

Piston & Rod Assembly

1. Ensure connecting rod and connecting rod cap are marked with corresponding cylinder number for
installation reference. Piston, connecting rod and connecting rod cap must be installed with front mark
toward front of engine. See Fig. 31 .
2. Check for movement of piston back and forth on piston pin. Replace piston and piston pin as an assembly
if movement exists. When removing piston from connecting rod, remove snap rings from piston. Heat
piston to 176-194°F (80-90°C) in water. Remove piston pin. Separate piston from connecting rod.
3. Ensure nut rotates easily on connecting rod bolt. If nut does not rotate easily, use caliper to measure
outside diameter of connecting rod bolt. Measure connecting rod bolt outside diameter at .98" (25.0 mm)
from end of bolt, just above threads. Replace connecting rod bolt and nut if bolt outside diameter is less
than .315" (8.00 mm).
4. Measure piston diameter at 1.65" (42.0 mm) from top of piston at 90-degree angle to piston pin. Different
piston sizes are used. Piston diameter is determined by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on top of
piston. See Fig. 32 . Ensure piston and piston pin diameter are within specification. See PISTONS, PINS
& RINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
5. Ensure connecting rod pin bushing bore diameter, crankpin bore diameter, bend and twist are within
specification. See CONNECTING RODS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

NOTE: Crankpin bore diameter is identified by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped
on connecting rod. See Fig. 34 .

6. Bushing in connecting rod may be replaced if bore diameter is not within specification. Ensure bushing
oil hole aligns with connecting rod oil hole. Bushing must be honed to obtain correct piston pin-to-rod
clearance. See PISTONS, PINS & RINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

NOTE: Piston pin should slide in piston using thumb pressure with piston heated
to 176-194°F (80-90°C).

7. To reassemble, install NEW snap ring in one side of piston. Install piston on connecting rod with front
marks on top of piston and connecting rod aligned. See Fig. 31 . Heat piston to 176-194°F (80°C) in
water. Coat piston pin with engine oil and install. Install NEW snap ring on other end of piston.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 42 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 31: Locating Front Marks & Aligning Piston With Connecting Rod
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fitting Pistons

1. To determine piston-to-cylinder clearance, measure piston skirt diameter at 1.65" (42.0 mm) from top of
piston at 90-degree angle to piston pin.
2. Different piston sizes are used. Piston diameter is determined by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on
top of piston. See Fig. 32 . Ensure piston diameter is within specification. See PISTONS, PINS &
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 43 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

RINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.


3. Measure cylinder bore diameter at 2 different places, 90 degrees apart at .39" (10.0 mm) from top and
bottom of cylinder bore and at center of cylinder bore. Different cylinder bore sizes are used. Cylinder
bore diameter may be identified by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on cylinder block deck surface.
See Fig. 32 . Front size mark is for cylinder No. 1 and rear size mark is for cylinder No. 6.
4. Ensure cylinder bore diameter is within specification. See CYLINDER BLOCK under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Determine piston clearance. Replace pistons or bore cylinder block if piston
clearance is not within specification. See PISTONS, PINS & RINGS under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Cylinder block may be bored for .020" (.50 mm) or .040" (1.00 mm) oversize
pistons.

Fig. 32: Locating Piston & Cylinder Bore Size Marks


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Piston Rings

1. Ensure piston ring end gap and side clearance are within specification. See PISTONS, PINS & RINGS
under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Position piston rings with ring end gaps in proper areas with identification mark on piston ring toward top
of piston. See Fig. 33 . No. 1 compression ring contains a 1R identification mark and N o. 2 compression
ring contains a 2R identification mark. Ensure piston rings are installed in correct location.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 44 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 33: Positioning Piston Rings


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Rod Bearings

1. Ensure connecting rod and connecting rod cap are marked with corresponding cylinder number for
installation reference. Connecting rod and connecting rod cap must be installed with front mark
(protrusion) toward front of engine. See Fig. 31 .
2. Ensure nut rotates easily on connecting rod bolt. If nut does not rotate easily, use caliper to measure
outside diameter of connecting rod bolt. Measure connecting rod bolt outside diameter at .98" (25.0 mm)
from end of bolt, just above threads. Replace connecting rod bolt and nut if bolt outside diameter is less
than .315" (8.00 mm).
3. Connecting rod, rod bearing and crankshaft are stamped with a size mark. See Fig. 34 . If replacing rod
bearing, ensure size mark on replacement rod bearing is same as size mark on original rod bearing.
4. If size mark on original rod bearing cannot be obtained, add size marks on crankshaft and connecting rod
together to determine size mark of rod bearing. For example, if size mark on crankshaft is "2" and size
mark on connecting rod is "1", use rod bearing with size mark "3".
5. Rod bearing thickness is determined by size mark. See ROD BEARING SPECIFICATIONS . Ensure
connecting rod and connecting rod cap are installed with front mark (protrusion) toward front of engine.
See Fig. 31 .
6. Coat bolt threads and nut-to-connecting rod cap surface with engine oil. Tighten connecting rod nuts to
specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Ensure bearing oil clearance and connecting rod side
play are within specification. See CRANKSHAFT, MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS and
CONNECTING RODS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

ROD BEARING SPECIFICATIONS


Size Mark In. (mm)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 45 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

"2" .0687-.0688 (1.744-1.747)


"3" .0688-.0689 (1.747-1.750)
"4" .0689-.0690 (1.750-1.753)
"5" .0690-.0691 (1.753-1.756)
"6" .0691-.0693 (1.756-1.759)

Fig. 34: Locating Crankshaft Rod Journal, Connecting Rod & Rod Bearing Size Marks
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 46 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Crankshaft & Main Bearings

1. Main bearing caps are numbered on top of cap for location and arrow on cap points toward front of
engine. Main bearing cap No. 1 is at front of engine and No. 7 is at rear of engine. Evenly loosen main
bearing cap bolts in sequence using several steps. See Fig. 35 . Remove main bearing caps, crankshaft,
thrust bearings and main bearings.
2. Using caliper, measure main bearing cap bolt outside diameter on threaded area 1.18" (30.0 mm) from
bottom of bolt. Replace main bearing cap bolt if bolt outside diameter is less than .417" (10.60 mm).
Cylinder block main bearing bore inside diameter is determined by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on
cylinder block. See Fig. 36 . Front size mark indicates No. 1 bore and rear size mark indicates No. 7 bore.
3. Crankshaft main bearing journal diameter is determined by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on
crankshaft counterweight. See Fig. 36 . Ensure journal diameter, taper and out-of-round are within
specification. See CRANKSHAFT, MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Replace crankshaft if not within specification.
4. Main bearing size mark ("2", "3", "4", "5" or "6") is stamped on side of main bearing. See Fig. 36 . If
replacing main bearing, ensure size mark on replacement main bearing is same as size mark on original
main bearing.
5. If size mark on original main bearing cannot be obtained, add size marks on cylinder block and crankshaft
to determine size mark of main bearing. For example, if size mark on cylinder block is "2" and size mark
on crankshaft is "1", use main bearing with size mark "3".
6. Main bearing thickness is determined by size mark. See MAIN BEARING SPECIFICATIONS . Install
main bearings, thrust bearings, crankshaft and main bearing caps.

CAUTION: Main bearing caps must be installed with arrow pointing toward front
of engine. Ensure main bearing caps are installed in numerical order
with No. 1 at front of engine and No. 7 at rear of engine.

7. Coat threads and bolt head-to-main bearing cap contact surfaces with engine oil. Install and tighten main
bearing cap bolts to specification in sequence using several steps. See Fig. 35 . See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .
8. Ensure crankshaft end play and main bearing oil clearance are within specification. See CRANKSHAFT,
MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS . Replace thrust bearing if crankshaft end play is not
within specification.

MAIN BEARING SPECIFICATIONS


Size Mark In. (mm)
"2" .0981-.0982 (2.492-2.495)
"3" .0982-.0983 (2.495-2.498)
"4" .0983-.0985 (2.498-2.501)
"5" .0985-.0986 (2.501-2.504)
"6" .0986-.0987 (2.504-2.507)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 47 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 35: Main Bearing Cap Bolt Removal & Installation Sequence
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 48 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 36: Locating Crankshaft Main Journal, Cylinder Block & Main Bearing Size Marks
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 49 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Thrust Bearing

Install thrust bearing on No. 4 main bearing with grooves toward crankshaft (away from cylinder block and
main bearing cap). Replace thrust bearing if crankshaft end play is not within specification. See
CRANKSHAFT, MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

Cylinder Block

1. Inspect cylinder block deck surface warpage. Replace cylinder block if deck surface warpage exceeds
specification. See CYLINDER BLOCK under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Measure cylinder bore diameter at 2 different places, 90 degrees apart at .39" (10.0 mm) from top and
bottom of cylinder bore and at center of cylinder bore. Different cylinder bore sizes are used. Cylinder
bore diameter may be identified by size mark ("1", "2" or "3") stamped on cylinder block deck surface.
See Fig. 32 . Front size mark is for cylinder No. 1 and rear size mark is for cylinder No. 6.
3. Ensure cylinder bore diameter is within specification. See CYLINDER BLOCK under ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS. Determine piston clearance. Bore all cylinders on cylinder block if cylinder bore
diameter exceeds specification. Cylinder block may be bored for .020" (.50 mm) or .040" (1.00 mm)
oversize pistons.
4. Install main bearing caps in numerical sequence with arrow on cap pointing toward front of engine.
Install tighten bolts to specification in sequence. See Fig. 35 . Ensure main bearing bore inside diameter is
within specification. See CYLINDER BLOCK under ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS.

NOTE: Main bearing bore inside diameter is determined by size mark ("1", "2" or
"3") stamped on cylinder block. See Fig. 36 .

5. Check cylinder block orifice for damage or restriction. Cylinder block orifice is screwed into cylinder
block at front corner of cylinder block deck surface. See Fig. 37 . Replace cylinder block orifice if
damaged or restricted.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 50 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 37: Locating Cylinder Block Orifice


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

ENGINE OILING
ENGINE LUBRICATING SYSTEM

Oil pump provides pressurized engine lubrication. Oil cooler is mounted on side of cylinder block. Oil spray
nozzles, mounted in cylinder block are used to cool pistons. Oil jet is mounted on front of cylinder block and
provides lubrication to timing chain and sprockets. See Fig. 38 .

Crankcase Capacity

Crankcase capacity with oil filter is 7.5 qts. (7.2L).

Oil Pressure

With engine at normal operating temperature, oil pressure should be at least 4.3 psi (0.3 kg/cm2 ) at idle and
approximately 36-71 psi (2.5-5.0 kg/cm2 ) at 3000 RPM.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 51 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 38: Cross-Sectional View Of Engine Oiling System


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OIL PUMP

NOTE: Manufacturer recommends cylinder head and timing chain cover removal when
servicing oil pump. Cylinder head gasket is on top of timing chain cover and oil
pump is mounted in timing chain cover.

Removal & Disassembly

Remove cylinder head. See CYLINDER HEAD under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Remove timing
chain cover. See TIMING CHAIN under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Remove oil pump relief valve plug,
gasket, spring and relief valve. See Fig. 39 . Remove bolts, oil pump cover, gasket and rotors. Remove
crankshaft front seal (if necessary).

Inspection
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 52 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

1. Inspect components for damage. Coat relief valve with engine oil and ensure relief valve slides freely in
bore of timing chain cover. Replace relief valve and/or timing chain cover if relief valve fails to slide
freely.
2. Install drive and driven rotors in timing chain cover. Using feeler gauge, measure driven rotor-to-timing
chain cover clearance. Replace rotor assembly or timing chain cover if clearance exceeds specification.
See OIL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS .
3. Using feeler gauge, measure rotor tip clearance between tip of drive rotor and tip of driven rotor. Tip of
drive rotor is on outside of rotor and tip of driven rotor is on inside of rotor. Replace rotor assembly if
clearance exceeds specification. See OIL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS .
4. Place straightedge across timing chain cover, above both rotors. Using feeler gauge, measure rotor end
clearance between straightedge and surface of each rotor. Replace rotor assembly or timing chain cover if
end clearance exceeds specification. See OIL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS .

OIL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Driven Rotor-To-Timing Chain Cover Clearance
Standard .0039-.0067 (.100-.170)
Wear Limit .0118 (.300)
Rotor End Clearance
Standard .0012-.0035 (.030-.090)
Wear Limit .0059 (.150)
Rotor Tip Clearance
Standard .0012-.0063 (.030-.160)
Wear Limit .0098 (.250)

Reassembly & Installation

1. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure using NEW gaskets. Tighten oil pump relief valve plug to
specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
2. If installing crankshaft front seal, apply grease to seal lip of NEW seal. Using hammer, Handle (SST
09316-00011) and Seal Installer (SST 09316-00051), install seal until seal surface is even with timing
chain cover.
3. To install, reverse removal procedure. Ensure proper procedures are used when installing timing chain
cover and cylinder head. See CYLINDER HEAD and TIMING CHAIN under REMOVAL &
INSTALLATION.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 53 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Fig. 39: Exploded View Of Oil Pump & Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OIL COOLER

Removal

1. Oil cooler is mounted on side of cylinder block. See Fig. 40 . Drain cooling system. Remove air intake
hose with airflow meter and air cleaner cover. Remove front exhaust pipe with front catalytic converter
and gasket from exhaust manifold and rear catalytic converter on center exhaust pipe.
2. Remove heat insulator, No. 1 (front) exhaust manifold and gasket from cylinder head. See Fig. 8 .
Remove oil pressure switch for access to oil cooler. Remove oil cooler cover-to-cylinder block bolts/nuts,
oil cooler cover, oil cooler and gasket from cylinder block. See Fig. 40 .
3. Remove oil cooler-to-oil cooler cover nuts. Separate oil cooler and gaskets from oil cooler cover. Remove
oil cooler relief valve plug, gasket, spring and relief valve.

Inspection

Coat relief valve with engine oil and ensure relief valve slides freely in bore of oil cooler cover. Replace relief
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 54 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

valve and/or oil cooler cover if relief valve fails to slide freely. Inspect oil cooler for damage or restriction.
Replace oil cooler if damaged or restricted.

Installation

To install, reverse removal procedure using NEW gaskets. Tighten bolts/nuts to specification. Fill cooling
system.

Fig. 40: Exploded View Of Oil Cooler & Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OIL SPRAY NOZZLE

NOTE: Cylinder block has oil spray nozzles for each piston. See Fig. 38 . A check valve
ball is located in oil spray nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt. Ensure proper bolts are
used for oil spray nozzle installation.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 55 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Removal

Remove timing chain cover and timing chain. See TIMING CHAIN under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
Remove crankshaft. See CRANKSHAFT & MAIN BEARINGS under CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY
under OVERHAUL. Remove oil spray nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt. Remove oil spray nozzle.

Inspection

Inspect oil spray nozzle for damage or restriction. Insert small wooden object into threaded end of oil spray
nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt. Apply pressure against check ball inside oil spray nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt.
Ensure check ball moves. Replace oil spray nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt if check ball fails to move.

Installation

1. Install oil spray nozzle in cylinder block. Ensure pin on oil spray nozzle engages with pin hole in cylinder
block. Install and tighten oil spray nozzle-to-cylinder block bolt to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .
2. Install crankshaft using proper procedure. See CRANKSHAFT & MAIN BEARINGS under
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY under OVERHAUL. Install timing chain and timing chain cover
using proper procedure. See TIMING CHAIN under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Application Specification
Displacement 274 Cu. In. (4.5L)
Bore 3.94" (100.0 mm)
Stroke 3.74" (95.0 mm)
Compression Ratio 9.0:1
Fuel System SFI
Horsepower @ RPM 212 @ 4600
Torque Ft. Lbs. @ RPM 275 @ 3200

CRANKSHAFT, MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

CRANKSHAFT, MAIN & CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS


Application In. (mm)
Crankshaft
End Play
Standard .0008-.0087 (.020-.220)
Wear Limit .0118 (.300)
Maximum Runout .0024 (.060)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 56 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Main Bearings
Journal Diameter (1)
Size Mark "1" 2.7163-2.7165 (68.994-69.000)
Size Mark "2" 2.7161-2.7163 (68.988-68.994)
Size Mark "3" 2.7158-2.7161 (68.982-68.988)
Journal Out-Of-Round & Taper .0008 (.020)
Oil Clearance
Standard Crankshaft Journal
Standard .0014-.0021 (.036-.054)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)
.010" (.25 mm) Undersize Crankshaft Journal
Standard .0014-.0030 (.036-.075)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)
Connecting Rod Bearings
Journal Diameter (2)
Size Mark "1" 2.2439-2.2441 (56.994-57.000)
Size Mark "2" 2.2436-2.2439 (56.988-56.994)
Size Mark "3" 2.2434-2.2436 (56.982-56.988)
Journal Out-Of-Round & Taper .0008 (.020)
Oil Clearance
Standard Crankshaft Journal
Standard .0013-.0020 (.032-.050)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)
.010" (.25 mm) Undersize Crankshaft Journal
Standard .0013-.0029 (.032-.073)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)
(1) Main bearing journal diameter is determined by size mark on crankshaft. See Fig. 36 .

(2) Connecting rod journal diameter is determined by size mark on crankshaft. See Fig. 34 .

CONNECTING RODS

CONNECTING RODS
Application In. (mm)
Bore Diameter
Bushing Pin Bore 1.0239-1.0244 (26.008-26.020)
Crankpin Bore (1)
Size Mark "1" 2.3829-2.3831 (60.526-
60.532)
Size Mark "2" 2.3831-2.3834 (60.532-
60.538)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 57 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Size Mark "3" 2.3834-2.3836 (60.538-


60.544)
Maximum Bend .0020 Per 3.94 (.050 Per 100.0)
Maximum Twist .0059 Per 3.94 (.150 Per 100.0)
Side Play
Standard .0063-.0103 (.160-.262)
Wear Limit .0143 (.362)
(1) Crankpin bore diameter is determined by size mark on connecting rod. See Fig. 34 .

PISTONS, PINS & RINGS

PISTONS, PINS & RINGS


Application In. (mm)
Pistons
Clearance .0016-.0024 (.040-.060)
Diameter (1)
Size Mark "1" 3.9350-3.9354 (99.950-99.960)
Size Mark "2" 3.9354-3.9358 (99.960-99.970)
Size Mark "3" 3.9358-3.9362 (99.970-99.980)
Pins
Diameter 1.0236-1.0241 (26.000-26.012)
Piston Fit (2)

Rod Fit
Standard .0002-.0005 (.005-.012)
Wear Limit .0020 (.050)
Rings
No. 1
End Gap
Standard .0118-.0205 (.300-.520)
Wear Limit .0441 (1.120)
Side Clearance .0016-.0031 (.040-.080)
No. 2
End Gap
Standard .0177-.0264 (.450-.670)
Wear Limit .0461 (1.170)
Side Clearance .0012-.0028 (.030-.070)
No. 3 (Oil)
End Gap
Standard .0059-.0205 (.150-.520)
Wear Limit .0441 (1.120)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 58 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

(1) Piston diameter is determined by size mark stamped on top of piston. See Fig. 32 .

(2) Piston pin should slide into piston using thumb pressure after piston is heated to 176-194°F (80-90°
C).

CYLINDER BLOCK

CYLINDER BLOCK
Application In. (mm)
Cylinder Bore
Standard Diameter (1)
Size Mark "1" 3.9370-3.9374 (100.000-
100.010)
Size Mark "2" 3.9374-3.9378 (100.010-
100.020)
Size Mark "3" 3.9378-3.9382 (100.020-
100.030)
Maximum Deck Warpage .0020 (.050)
Main Bearing Bore I.D. (2)
Size Mark "1" 2.9144-2.9146 (74.026-74.032)
Size Mark "2" 2.9146-2.9149 (74.032-74.038)
Size Mark "3" 2.9149-2.9151 (74.038-74.044)
(1) Cylinder bore diameter is determined by size mark on cylinder block deck surface. See Fig. 32 .
Maximum cylinder bore diameter is 3.9461" (100.230 mm).
(2) Main bearing bore diameter is determined by size mark stamped on cylinder block. See Fig. 36 .

VALVES & VALVE SPRINGS

VALVES & VALVE SPRINGS


Application Specification
Intake Valves
Face Angle 44.5°
Minimum Margin .039" (1.00 mm)
Minimum Refinish Length 3.854" (97.90 mm)
Stem Diameter .2744-.2750" (6.970-6.985
mm)
Exhaust Valves
Face Angle 44.5°
Minimum Margin .039" (1.00 mm)
Minimum Refinish Length 3.835" (97.40 mm)
Stem Diameter .2742-.2748" (6.965-6.980
mm)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 59 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Valve Springs
Free Length 1.7299-1.7740" (43.940-
45.060 mm)
Out-Of-Square .079" (2.00 mm)
Pressure 48-53 Lbs. @ 1.437 In. (21.8-
24.0 kg @ 36.50 mm)

CYLINDER HEAD

CYLINDER HEAD
Application Specification
Maximum Warpage
Cylinder Block Surface .0059" (.150 mm)
Manifold Surface .0039" (.100 mm)
Valve Seats
Intake Valve
Seat Angle 45°
Seat Width .047-.063" (1.20-1.60 mm)
Exhaust Valve
Seat Angle 45°
Seat Width .039-.055" (1.00-1.40 mm)
Valve Guides
Intake Valve
Valve Guide Cylinder Head Bore I.D.
Standard Valve Guide .4524-.4533" (11.492-11.513
mm)
Oversize Valve Guide .4544-.4552" (11.542-11.563
mm)
Valve Guide I.D. .2760-.2768" (7.010-7.030 mm)
Valve Guide Installed Height .323-.339" (8.20-8.60 mm)
Valve Stem-To-Guide Oil Clearance
Standard .0010-.0024" (.025-.060 mm)
Wear Limit .0031" (.080 mm)
Exhaust Valve
Valve Guide Cylinder Head Bore I.D.
Standard Valve Guide .4524-.4533" (11.492-11.513
mm)
Oversize Valve Guide .4544-.4552" (11.542-11.563
mm)
Valve Guide I.D. .2760-.2768" (7.010-7.030 mm)
Valve Guide Installed Height .323-.339" (8.20-8.60 mm)
Valve Stem-To-Guide Oil Clearance
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 60 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Standard .0012-.0026" (.030-.065 mm)


Wear Limit .0039" (.100 mm)

CAMSHAFT

CAMSHAFT
Application In. (mm)
End Play
Standard .0012-.0031 (.030-.080)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)
Gear Backlash
Standard .0008-.0079 (.020-.200)
Wear Limit .0118 (.300)
Journal Diameter 1.0614-1.0620 (26.959-26.975)
Journal Runout .0024 (.060)
Lobe Height
Standard 1.9925-1.9965 (50.610-
50.710)
Wear Limit 1.9886 (50.510)
Oil Clearance
Standard .0010-.0024 (.025-.062)
Wear Limit .0039 (.100)

VALVE LIFTERS

VALVE LIFTERS
Application In. (mm)
Bore Diameter 1.3386-1.3394 (34.000-34.021)
Lifter Diameter 1.3372-1.3376 (33.966-33.976)
Oil Clearance
Standard .0009-.0022 (.024-.055)
Wear Limit .0028 (.070)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
A/C Compressor Bolt 18 (24)
A/C Compressor Mounting Bracket Bolt 27 (37)
Air Intake Chamber Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
Air Intake Chamber Support Brace Bolt 26 (35)
Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolt 12 (16)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 61 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

Camshaft Sprocket Bolt 54 (73)


Connecting Rod Nut
Step 1 35 (47)
Step 2 Additional 90 Degrees
Coolant By-Pass Outlet Bolt 15 (20)
Coolant By-Pass Outlet Pipe Bolt 15 (20)
Coolant Outlet Nut 15 (20)
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 304 (412)
Cylinder Head-To-Cylinder Block Bolt (1)
Step 1 29 (39)
Step 2 Additional 90 Degrees
Step 3 Additional 90 Degrees
Cylinder Head-To-Timing Chain Cover Bolt 15 (20)
Damper Bolt 15 (20)
Delivery Pipe Bolt-To-Intake Manifold Bolt 15 (20)
Distributor Hold-Down Bolt 13 (18)
Drive Belt Idler Pulley Bolt 32 (43)
Drive Plate Bolt 74 (100)
Drive Shaft Flange Bolt/Nut
Front Drive Shaft 54 (73)
Rear Drive Shaft 65 (88)
EGR Pipe Union Nut 58 (79)
EGR Pipe-To-Cylinder Head Bolt 15 (20)
Engine Hanger-To-Cylinder Head Bolt 30 (41)
Engine Mount-To-Frame Nut 55 (75)
Front Exhaust Pipe-To-Exhaust Manifold Nut 46 (62)
Front Exhaust Pipe-To-Rear Catalytic Converter Bolt/Nut 34 (46)
Fuel Inlet Hose-To-Fuel Filter Union Bolt 21 (29)
Fuel Return Pipe Bolt 15 (20)
Generator Mounting Bracket-To-Cylinder Head Bolt 32 (43)
Heater Coolant Pipe Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
Heat Insulator Bolt 14 (19)
Intake Manifold-To-Cylinder Head Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
Knock Sensor 33 (45)
Main Bearing Cap Bolt (2)
Step 1 54 (73)
Step 2 Additional 90 Degrees
No. 1 Fuel Pipe Bolt
Union Bolt 21 (29)
Retaining Bolt 15 (20)
No. 1 Oil Pan Bolt/Nut
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 62 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
4.5L 6-CYL 1997 ENGINES Lexus/Toyota 4.5L 6-Cylinder

12-mm Head 15 (20)


14-mm Head 32 (43)
No. 1 Oil Pan-To-Transmission Housing Bolt 53 (72)
No. 1 & 2 Exhaust Manifold Nut 29 (39)
Oil Cooler Cover-To-Cylinder Block Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
Oil Cooler Line-To-Transmission Union Nut 25 (34)
Oil Cooler Relief Valve Plug 27 (37)
Oil Cooler-To-Oil Cooler Cover Nut 12 (16)
Oil Filter Union 33 (45)
Oil Jet Bolt 15 (20)
Oil Pump Pick-Up Tube-To-No. 1 Oil Pan Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
Oil Pump Relief Valve Plug 36 (49)
Oil Spray Nozzle-To-Cylinder Block Bolt 18 (24)
Power Steering Pump-To-Cylinder Block Bolt 27 (37)
Power Steering Reservoir Bolt 15 (20)
Pressure Hose-To-Power Steering Pump Union Bolt 42 (57)
Rear Oil Seal Housing Bolt 15 (20)
Slipper Bolt 51 (69)
Spark Plug 15 (20)
Stabilizer Bar Mount-To-Frame Bolt 13 (18)
Stabilizer Bar-To-Axle Housing Bolt 18 (24)
Starter Bolt 29 (39)
Throttle Body Bolt 15 (20)
Timing Chain Cover Bolt 15 (20)
Timing Chain Tensioner Nut 15 (20)
Torque Converter Bolt 41 (56)
Transfer Case Shift Lever Bolt 13 (18)
Transmission Crossmember-To-Frame Bolt 45 (61)
Transmission Mount-To-Transmission Crossmember Nut 55 (75)
Transmission-To-Cylinder Block Bolt 53 (72)
Water Pump Bolt/Nut 15 (20)
INCH Lbs. (N.m)
Cylinder Block Orifice 69 (7.8)
No. 2 Oil Pan Bolt/Nut 78 (8.8)
Oil Level Sensor Bolt 48 (5.4)
Oil Pan Baffle Plate-To-No. 1 Oil Pan Bolt/Nut 80 (9.0)
Transmission Shift Lever Assembly Bolt 48 (5.4)
Transmission Shift Linkage-To-Control Rod Nut 115 (13.0)
(1) Tighten bolts to specification in sequence. See Fig. 9 .

(2) Tighten bolts to specification in sequence. See Fig. 35 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:17:51 PM Page 63 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

WARNING: To avoid injury from accidental air bag deployment, read and carefully
follow all WARNINGS and SERVICE PRECAUTIONS .

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deploys a steering wheel pad (driver-side air bag) and passenger-side air
bag during a frontal impact of sufficient force. See Fig. 1 .

Air bag sensor assembly is mounted on the floor inside the console box, and consists of an air bag sensor, safing
sensor, diagnosis sensor circuit and ignition control, drive circuit, etc. It receives signals from the air bag
sensors and determines whether SRS must be activated or not.

Inflator and bag of SRS are stored in steering wheel pad (driver-side air bag) and passenger-side air bag
assemblies and cannot be disassembled. The inflator contains a squib, igniter charge, gas generant, and inflates
when activated by air bag sensor assembly. The spiral cable is used as an electrical joint from vehicle body side
to the steering wheel.

Air bag warning light, located in instrument cluster, goes on to alert driver of trouble in system when a
malfunction is detected in air bag sensor assembly.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:58
2:10:54 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 1: Locating SRS Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position. Air bag warning light in instrument cluster should come on for
about 6 seconds and then go out. If light does not respond as specified, SRS is malfunctioning and needs repair.
See DIAGNOSIS .

SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions when working on SRS:

 Before servicing any SRS or steering column component, disable SRS. See DISABLING &
ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Failure to disable system could result in accidental air bag
deployment and personal injury.
 When troubleshooting SRS, always check for diagnostic codes before disconnecting battery.
 After ignition switch is turned to LOCK position and negative battery cable is disconnected, wait at least
90 seconds before working on SRS. SRS is equipped with a back-up power source that may allow air bag
to deploy within 90 seconds of disconnecting negative battery cable.
 In a minor collision in which air bags do not deploy, steering wheel pad must be inspected.
 NEVER use air bag parts from another vehicle. Replace air bag parts with new parts.
 Air bag sensor assembly contains mercury. After replacement, DO NOT destroy the old part. When
scrapping vehicle or replacing air bag sensor assembly, remove air bag sensor assembly and dispose of as
toxic waste.
 Never disassemble or repair system components. Replace cracked, dented or otherwise damaged system
components.
 When troubleshooting electrical circuits, use a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) with high impedance
(10-k/ohm minimum).
 Information labels are attached to air bag components. Follow all notices on labels.
 After servicing SRS, check air bag warning light to ensure system is functioning properly. See SYSTEM
OPERATION CHECK .
 Always wear safety glasses when servicing or handling an air bag.
 When placing a live air bag on a bench or other surface, always face air bag and trim cover up, away from
surface. This will reduce motion of module if accidentally deployed.
 After deployment, air bag surface may contain deposits of sodium hydroxide which irritates skin. During
clean-up, always wear safety glasses, rubber gloves and long-sleeved shirt. After clean-up, wash hands
using mild soap and water.
 When carrying a live air bag module, trim cover must be pointed away from your body to minimize
injury in case of accidental deployment.
 If SRS is not fully functional for any reason, vehicle should not be driven until system is repaired and
again becomes operational. DO NOT remove bulbs, modules, sensors or other components or in any way
disable system from operating normally. If SRS is not functional, park vehicle until it is repaired and
functions properly.

ADJUSTMENTS
SPIRAL CABLE
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Ensure front wheels are in straight-ahead position. Turn spiral cable counterclockwise until it is hard to turn.
Turn spiral cable clockwise about 3 turns until Red mating mark is aligned. See Fig. 2 .

Fig. 2: Aligning Marks On Spiral Cable


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM

NOTE: If diagnosing SRS, check for diagnostic codes before disconnecting negative
battery cable.

WARNING: Back-up power supply maintains SRS voltage for about 90 seconds after
battery is disconnected. After disabling SRS, wait at least 90 seconds
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

before servicing SRS. Servicing SRS before 90 seconds may cause


accidental air bag deployment and possible personal injury.

DISABLING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds before
working on system. Remove steering wheel pad. See STEERING WHEEL PAD & SPIRAL CABLE under
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION. Disconnect passenger-side air bag connector. Disconnect air bag sensor
assembly connector. See Fig. 3 and Fig. 7 .

Fig. 3: Disconnecting Passenger-Side Air Bag Connector


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

ACTIVATING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Connect steering wheel pad, passenger-side air bag assembly, and air
bag sensor assembly connectors. Install steering wheel pad. Reconnect negative battery cable. Check air bag
warning light for proper system function, perform SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

WARNING: Undeployed air bags contain substances that can cause illness or injury if
improperly handled. Disposing of undeployed components may violate
federal, state and/or local laws. If scrapping vehicle, components must be
deployed while still mounted in vehicle. DO NOT deploy components
inside vehicle unless vehicle is to be scrapped. Wear gloves and safety
glasses when handling components. Wrap deployed components in a
sturdy plastic bag. Dispose of components like any other part.

DEPLOYING DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG

On-Vehicle Deployment (Scrapped Vehicles Only)

1. Before proceeding, follow service precautions. See SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Ensure SRS Air Bag
Deployment Tool (09082-00700) is functioning properly, see DEPLOYMENT TOOL CHECK .
2. If steering wheel or steering wheel pad is loose and cannot be tightened, DO NOT deploy air bag using
this procedure. Instead, go to Off-Vehicle Deployment. If steering wheel and steering wheel pad are not
loose, remove under cover No. 1 and disconnect spiral cable air bag connector. See Fig. 9 . Connect
deployment tool to spiral cable connector.
3. Position deployment tool and power source (battery) 33 ft. from front of vehicle. Close all doors and
windows of vehicle. Connect deployment tool Red clip to positive battery terminal and Black clip to
negative battery terminal. Ensure no one is within 33 ft. of vehicle. Press deployment tool activation
switch to deploy air bag. DO NOT touch air bag for 30 minutes after deployment.

Off-Vehicle Deployment

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Disable air bag system. See DISABLING &
ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Remove steering wheel pad from vehicle. See STEERING
WHEEL PAD & SPIRAL CABLE under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
2. Obtain a road wheel rim and tire assembly from a scrap vehicle. Install two 1.4 in. (35 mm) bolts in
steering wheel pad mounting holes. Tighten bolts by hand until they become difficult to turn. DO NOT
overtighten bolts.
3. Wrap heavy-gauge wire around bolts at least twice. See Fig. 4 . Ensure no slack is present in wire. If
slack is present, or if wire is not strong enough, steering wheel pad may become loose due to shock when
air bag is deployed.
4. Position steering wheel pad on rim and tire assembly with pad side facing upward. Ensuring wire is tight,
separately tie left and right sides of steering wheel pad to wheel rim through lug nut holes. See Fig. 5 .
Position steering wheel pad connector so that it hangs downward through hub hole in disc wheel.
5. Ensure SRS Air Bag Deployment Tool (09082-00700) is functioning properly, see DEPLOYMENT
TOOL CHECK . Connect deployment tool to steering wheel pad connector. To prevent damage to
deployment connector and harness, do not lock secondary lock of twin lock and provide slack for
deployment harness.
6. Position deployment tool and power source (battery) 33 ft. from steering wheel pad. Obtain cardboard
box larger than wheel assembly and place it over wheel assembly, or stack 3 scrap tires on top of rim and
tire assembly (but NOT directly on steering wheel pad).
7. Connect deployment tool Red clip to positive battery terminal and Black clip to negative battery terminal.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Ensure no one is within 33 ft. of steering wheel pad. Press activation switch to deploy air bag. Wait 30
minutes before handling air bag.

Fig. 4: Installing Wire On Steering Wheel Pad


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 5: Installing Steering Wheel Pad On Wheel Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DEPLOYING PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG

On-Vehicle Deployment (Scrapped Vehicles Only)

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Ensure SRS Air Bag Deployment Tool (09082-
00700) is functioning properly, see DEPLOYMENT TOOL CHECK .
2. If passenger-side air bag is loose and cannot be tightened, DO NOT deploy air bag using this procedure.
Instead, go to Off-Vehicle Deployment. If passenger-side air bag is not loose, remove glove box and air
bag connector from bracket. Disconnect passenger-side air bag connector. See Fig. 11 . Connect
deployment tool connector to passenger-side air bag connector.
3. Position deployment tool and power source (battery) 33 ft. from vehicle. Close all doors and windows of
vehicle. Connect deployment tool Red clip to positive battery terminal and Black clip to negative battery
terminal. Ensure no one is within 33 ft. of vehicle. Press deployment tool activation switch to deploy air
bag. DO NOT touch air bag for 30 minutes after deployment.

Off-Vehicle Deployment

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Remove passenger-side air bag. See
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG under REMOVAL & INSTALLATION.
2. Obtain a scrap tire without a rim, that exceeds the following dimensions: 7.3 in. (185 mm) width and 14.2
in. (360 mm) inner diameter. Install the 4 nuts in passenger-side air bag assembly. Remove 2 passenger-
side air bag bracket retainer nuts and bracket.
3. Wrap heavy gauge wire harness around the tire and ensure wire is tight to prevent air bag assembly from
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

coming free. Position air bag assembly inside the tire with air bag deployment direction facing inside.
4. Place 2 tires under and over the tire to which air bag assembly is tied, the top tire should have wheel
installed. Tie tires together using 2 heavy gauge wiring harnesses and ensure wires are tight. See Fig. 6 .
5. Ensure SRS Air Bag Deployment Tool (09082-00700) is functioning properly, see DEPLOYMENT
TOOL CHECK . Connect deployment tool connector to air bag assembly connector, and place inside
tires. To prevent damage, do not lock secondary lock of twin lock and provide slack for deployment
harness.
6. Position deployment tool and power source (battery) 33 ft. from air bag assembly. Connect deployment
tool Red clip to positive battery terminal and Black clip to negative battery terminal. Ensure no one is
within 33 ft. of air bag assembly. Press activation switch to deploy air bag. Wait 30 minutes before
handling air bag.

Fig. 6: Deploying Passenger-Side Air Bag Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DEPLOYMENT TOOL CHECK

Connect Red clip of SRS Air Bag Deployment Tool (09082-00700) to positive battery terminal and Black clip
to negative battery terminal. Press deployment tool activation switch and confirm deployment tool light comes
on. If light does not function as indicated, replace tool and repeat procedure.

POST-COLLISION INSPECTION
POST-COLLISION AIR BAG SAFETY INSPECTION
Action Components

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Replace After Deployment Air Bag Module(s), Air Bag Sensor Assembly
Inspect & If Damaged, Replace Component (Even Glove Compartment Door, Instrument Panel,
If Air Bag Did Not Deploy) Instrument Panel Reinforcement, Spiral Cable,
Steering Wheel, Wiring Harness & Connectors
Comments If any components are damaged or bent, they must
be replaced.

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION

WARNING: Failure to follow air bag service precautions may result in air bag
deployment and personal injury. See SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . After
component replacement, perform a system operational check to ensure
proper system operation. See SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

AIR BAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

NOTE: Disconnect air bag sensor electrical connector before removing sensor
mounting screws.

Removal & Installation

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Disable SRS. See Disabling System under
DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM .
2. Air bag sensor located forward of center console (Fig. Fig. 1 ). Remove transfer shift knob, and front
console box. See Fig. 7 . Disconnect the connector with air bag sensor installed. Remove 4 Torx screws
and air bag sensor.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 7: Removing Air Bag Sensor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Installation

To install, reverse removal procedure. Tighten air bag sensor screws to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . Connect air bag sensor connector after the sensor is installed. Activate SRS. See
Activating System under DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Check air bag warning light
to ensure system is functioning properly. See SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

STEERING WHEEL PAD & SPIRAL CABLE

Removal

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Ensure front wheels are in a straight-ahead
position. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM .
2. Remove steering wheel lower covers No. 2 and 3. Loosen 2 Torx screws until groove along screw
circumference catches on screw case. See Fig. 8 . Pull steering wheel pad out from steering wheel and
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

disconnect air bag connector. See Fig. 9 .


3. Remove steering wheel nut. Match mark steering wheel and main shaft. Remove steering wheel using
puller. Remove instrument lower finish panel, No. 2 heater register duct, upper and lower column covers.
See Fig. 10 .
4. Disconnect the 2 combination switch/spiral cable connectors. Disconnect air bag connector. Remove the
4 screws. Remove combination switch and spiral cable. Remove spiral cable from combination switch.
DO NOT disassemble cable or apply oil to it.

Fig. 8: Removing Steering Wheel Pad


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 9: Disconnecting Steering Wheel Pad Connector


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 10: Steering Wheel Pad & Spiral Cable Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WARNING: During installation, if spiral cable mating mark is not properly aligned,
steering wheel may not turn completely, or flat cable inside spiral cable
may be severed, disabling SRS system.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Installation

To install, reverse removal procedure. Ensure spiral cable is properly aligned. See SPIRAL CABLE under
ADJUSTMENTS. Connect air bag connector. Using new Torx screws, tighten 2 screws to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install steering wheel side covers. Perform SYSTEM OPERATION
CHECK .

PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG

Removal & Installation

1. Before proceeding, see SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect and shield negative battery cable. Wait at least 90 seconds before working on system.
2. Remove glove box door. See Fig. 13 . Remove air bag connector from air bag bracket. Disconnect
passenger-side air bag connector. See Fig. 3 . Remove instrument panel. Remove the 4 bolts and 2 nuts
securing passenger-side air bag. See Fig. 11 . Remove air bag assembly. Pry up the 6 air bag door clips
and remove the air bag door. See Fig. 12 .
3. To install, reverse removal procedure. Tighten passenger-side air bag bolts to specification. See
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Activate SRS. See Activating System under DISABLING &
ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Check air bag warning light to ensure system is functioning
properly. See SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 11: Removing Passenger-Side Air Bag


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 12: Removing Passenger-Side Air Bag Door


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 13: Passenger-Side Air Bag Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT CHECK

Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position. If air bag warning light comes on then goes out after about 6
seconds, the system is OK at this time. If air bag warning light comes on and stays on (or flashes), diagnostic
code is stored in the air bag sensor. Go to RETRIEVING CODES . If air bag warning light responds in any
other way, go to DIAGNOSIS .

RETRIEVING CODES

CAUTION: If jumper wire is incorrectly connected across terminals of Data Link


Connector (DLC), system may be damaged.

Diagnosis Check Wire

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position. Wait about 20 seconds. Using Diagnosis Check Wire
(09843-18020), jump terminals Tc and E1 of Data Link Connector (DLC), located in right, rear corner of
engine compartment. See Fig. 14 .
2. If air bag warning light does not flash codes, go to CODE(S) NOT DISPLAYED under DIAGNOSIS. If
air bag warning light flashes continuously at a rate of 2 times per second, source voltage is low. Go to NO
CODES - SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP under appropriate TROUBLE SHOOTING.
3. If air bag warning light flashes codes, count number of flashes to determine code(s) that are set. For
example, Code 12 is: FLASH, pause, FLASH, FLASH. If more than one code is present, a 2.5-second
pause will occur between each code. Lowest numbered codes will be displayed followed by higher
numbered codes. See SRS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) table.
4. After all codes are displayed, a 4-second pause will occur and codes will be repeated. After code(s) have
been identified, see appropriate diagnostic code under TROUBLE SHOOTING and perform tests as
specified. After repairing system, clear codes. See CLEARING CODES .

Electrical Tester

Connect the Lexus Electrical Tester (09082-00040) to DLC3. Read codes by following prompts on tester
screen. Refer to electrical tester manual for instructions.

Fig. 14: Identifying Data Link Connector (DLC) Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

NOTE: If a code that is not listed in SRS CODES table is displayed, replace air bag
sensor. If air bag warning light does not function as described, go to CODE(S)
NOT DISPLAYED or see CODE(S) CONTINUOUSLY DISPLAYED .

SRS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)


DTC Possible Cause
Normal System Normal/Source Voltage Drop
11 Short To Ground In Squib Circuit
12 Short To B+ In Squib Circuit
14 Open In D Squib Circuit
31 Air Bag Sensor Assembly Malfunction
54 Open In P Squib Circuit

CLEARING CODES

Diagnosis Check Wire

1. At DLC, connect a jumper wire to terminal Tc, and another jumper wire to terminal AB. See Fig. 14 .
Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position. Wait about 6 seconds.
2. Starting with terminal Tc, apply body ground alternately to terminal Tc and terminal AB twice each, in
cycles of 1 second. Finally, keep applying body ground to terminal Tc. Several seconds after performing
clearing procedure, air bag warning light flashes 0.5 second cycle, indicating codes are cleared.

NOTE: When alternately connecting jumper probes to terminals, simultaneously


release one probe from one terminal while connecting other probe to other
terminal. If time interval between probings is too long, codes will not clear.

Electrical Tester

Connect the Lexus Electrical Tester (09082-00040) to DLC1. Clear codes by following prompts on tester
screen. Refer to electrical tester manual for instructions.

DIAGNOSIS

WARNING: Failure to follow air bag service precautions may result in air bag
deployment and personal injury. See SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . After
component replacement, perform system operational check to ensure
proper system operation. See SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

CAUTION: Ensure ignition switch is in LOCK position before disconnecting or


connecting negative battery cable. If ignition switch is in ACC or ON
position when negative battery cable is disconnected or connected, center
air bag sensor may be damaged.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON AT ALL

1. Remove and check continuity of ECU-B fuse. Fuse is in fuse panel, behind lower left side of instrument
panel. If fuse is faulty, replace fuse and go to step 5). If fuse is OK, go to next step.
2. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Connect negative battery
cable and turn ignition to ACC or ON position. Measure voltage at terminal LA of harness side connector
of air bag sensor assembly. If voltage is 10-14 volts, go to step 3). If voltage is not as specified, check air
bag warning light bulb and repair air bag warning light circuit. See Fig. 15 .
3. Disconnect negative battery cable. Connect air bag sensor assembly connector. Connect negative battery
cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition to ACC or ON position. If air bag warning light operates
correctly, the malfunction is normal, go to step 4). If air bag warning light does not operate correctly,
check terminal LA of air bag sensor assembly If normal, replace air bag sensor assembly.
4. Check ECU-B fuse. If fuse is not OK, check harness between ECU-B fuse and air bag warning light,
repair or replace as necessary. If fuse is OK, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD
CHECK and go to next step.
5. Check air bag warning light for proper system function, see SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK . If
warning light functions properly and does not indicate fault in SRS, system is OK, no further action
necessary. If warning light does not function properly or fault is indicated in SRS, go to appropriate
procedure for system diagnosis.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 15: Air Bag Sensor Connector Terminal ID


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON WITH IGNITION IN LOCK POSITION

Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Turn ignition switch to LOCK
position. Disconnect air bag sensor assembly connector. Reconnect negative battery cable. If air bag warning
light is off, replace air bag sensor assembly. If air bag warning light is still on, repair warning light circuit or AB
circuit leading to DLC. See Fig. 14 .

CODE(S) NOT DISPLAYED

NOTE: Use the following procedure if code(s) are not displayed or air bag warning light

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

stays on when jumper wire is connected between terminals Tc and E1 of DLC


connector.

1. Turn ignition switch from LOCK to ACC or ON position. If air bag warning light does not come on,
repair air bag warning light circuit. If air bag warning light comes on, go to next step.
2. Measure voltage between terminals Tc and E1 of DLC. See Fig. 14 . If voltage is 10-14 volts, go to step
4). If voltage is not as specified, go to next step.
3. Measure voltage between body ground and terminal Tc of DLC1. If voltage is 10-14 volts, check harness
between body ground and terminal E1 of DLC, repair or replace as necessary. If voltage is not as
specified, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Disconnect air
bag sensor assembly connector. Insert jumper wire into terminal Tc from back side. Connect air bag
sensor assembly connector with jumper wire. Connect negative battery cable. Turn ignition to ACC or
ON and wait 20 seconds. Connect jumper wire of terminal Tc to ground. If air bag warning light comes
on, check harness between air bag sensor assembly and DLC1. If warning light does not come on, replace
air bag sensor assembly.

CODE(S) CONTINUOUSLY DISPLAYED

NOTE: Use the following procedure if code(s) are displayed without connecting jumper
wire between terminals Tc and E1 of DLC connector.

Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait 90 seconds. Disconnect air
bag sensor assembly connector. Check resistance between terminal Tc of air bag sensor assembly connector and
body ground. See Fig. 15 . If resistance is 1 Mohm or greater, replace air bag sensor assembly. If resistance is
not as specified, repair or replace harness or connector. Check air bag warning light for proper system function,
see SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

RELEASE METHOD OF ACTIVATION PREVENTION

An air bag activation prevention mechanism is built into the connector for the squib circuit of the SRS. When
release of the air bag activation prevention mechanism is directed in diagnostic procedures, insert paper which
is same thickness as male terminal, between terminal and short spring. See Fig. 16 .

CAUTION: NEVER release activation prevention mechanism on steering wheel pad


connector.

CAUTION: DO NOT release activation prevention mechanism unless specifically


directed by procedures. If paper is too thick, it can damage the terminal
and short spring. Always use paper the same thickness as male terminal.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 16: Release Method Of Activation Prevention


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

SIMULATION METHOD CHECK

When a system fault or DTC has been diagnosed and repaired, ensure malfunction is normal. Reproduce
malfunction symptoms by performing tests to simulate driving conditions:

 Wiggle-test wiring harness.


 Using a hair dryer, apply heat to components.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

 Spray water onto entire vehicle (not directly onto electrical components) to simulate humidity.

TROUBLE SHOOTING

NOTE: Use Diagnosis Check Wiring (09843-18020) when connecting jumper wire
between terminals of DLC. Spiral cable upper connector is same as steering
wheel pad (squib) connector. Spiral cable lower connector (located under
steering column) connects the harness between spiral cable and air bag sensor
assembly.

NO CODES - SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Connect negative battery
cable. Turn ignition on. Measure voltage at IG2 or ACC on sensor with electrical accessories on
(defogger, wiper, headlights, heater blower, etc.) If voltage is 10-14 volts, go to next step. If voltage is not
as specified, check harness between battery and air bag sensor assembly and check battery and charging
system.
2. Turn ignition to LOCK. Connect steering wheel pad connector. Connect steering wheel pad, passenger-
side air bag, and air bag sensor assembly connector. Turn ignition on and operate electrical system as
specified. If air bag warning light turns off, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD
CHECK and go to next step.
3. If air bag warning light does not turn off, check for codes. Repair conditions that caused code to set. If
normal code is output, replace air bag sensor assembly. Check air bag warning light for proper system
function, see SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK .

DTC 11

NOTE: During testing, if codes other than DTC 11 are displayed, disregard them.

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . For connector between spiral
cable and steering wheel pad (spiral cable side), measure resistance between D+, D- and body ground.
See Fig. 15 . If resistance is 1 Mohm or greater, go to next step. If resistance is not as specified, go to step
9).
2. For connector between air bag sensor assembly and passenger-side air bag assembly (air bag sensor
assembly side), measure resistance between P+, P- and body ground. If resistance is 1 Mohm or greater,
go to next step. If resistance is not as specified, repair or replace harness or connector between air bag
sensor assembly and passenger-side air bag assembly.
3. Connect connector to air bag sensor assembly. Connect jumper wire between D+ and D- on spiral cable
side of connector between spiral cable and steering wheel pad. Connect jumper wire between P+ and P-
on air bag sensor assembly side of connector between air bag sensor assembly and passenger-side airbag
assembly. Reconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear malfunction codes stored
in memory. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn ignition to ACC or ON and wait at
least 20 seconds. Using Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) check code. If DTC 11 is not displayed, go
to next step. If DTC 11 is displayed, replace air bag sensor assembly.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

5. Turn ignition to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Connect steering
wheel pad connector. Connect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition to ACC or
ON and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Go to next step.
6. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Using diagnosis check wire (09843-18020) connect
terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. See Fig. 14 . Check code. If DTC 11 is not displayed, go to next step. If
DTC 11 is displayed, replace steering wheel pad.
7. Turn ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Reconnect
passenger-side air bag assembly connector. Connect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds.
Clear malfunction code. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait for at least 20 seconds. Go to next step.
8. Turn ignition to ACC or ON and wait for at least 20 seconds. Using diagnosis check wire (09843-18020)
connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. Check code. If DTC 11 is displayed, replace passenger-side air
bag assembly. If DTC 11 is not displayed, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD
CHECK and go to next step.
9. Disconnect connector between air bag sensor assembly and spiral cable. Measure resistance between D+
and body ground on spiral cable side of connector between spiral cable and steering wheel pad. If
resistance is 1 Mohm or greater, repair or replace harness or connector between air bag sensor assembly
and spiral cable. If resistance is not as specified, repair or replace spiral cable.

DTC 12

NOTE: During testing, if codes other than DTC 12 are displayed, disregard them.

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . For connector between spiral
cable and steering wheel pad (spiral cable side), measure voltage between D+, D- and body ground. See
Fig. 15 . If voltage is 0 volts, go to next step. If voltage is not as specified, go to step 9).
2. For connector between air bag sensor assembly and passenger-side air bag assembly (air bag sensor
assembly side), measure voltage between P+ and body ground. If voltage is 0 volts, go to next step. If
voltage is not as specified, repair or replace harness or connector between air bag sensor assembly and
passenger-side air bag assembly.
3. Connect connector to air bag sensor assembly. Connect jumper wire between D+ and D- of connector
between spiral cable and steering wheel pad (spiral cable side). Connect jumper wire between P+ and P-
on air bag sensor assembly side of connector between air bag sensor assembly and passenger-side airbag
assembly. Reconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear malfunction codes stored
in memory. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn ignition to ACC or ON and wait at
least 20 seconds. Using Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) check code. If DTC 12 is not displayed, go
to next step. If DTC 12 is displayed, replace air bag sensor assembly.
5. Turn ignition to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Connect steering
wheel pad connector. Connect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition to ACC or
ON and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Go to next step.
6. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Using diagnosis check wire (09843-18020) connect
terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. See Fig. 14 . Check code. If DTC 12 is not displayed, go to next step. If
DTC 12 is displayed, replace steering wheel pad.
7. Turn ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Reconnect
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

passenger-side air bag assembly connector. Connect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds.
Clear malfunction code. Turn ignition to LOCK and wait for at least 20 seconds. Go to next step.
8. Turn ignition to ACC or ON and wait for at least 20 seconds. Using diagnosis check wire (09843-18020)
connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. Check code. If DTC 12 is displayed, replace passenger-side air
bag sensor. If DTC 12 is not displayed, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD CHECK
and go to next step.
9. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Disconnect connector between air bag sensor assembly and spiral
cable.Turn ignition switch to ON position. Measure voltage between D+ and body ground on spiral cable
side of connector between spiral cable and steering wheel pad. If voltage is 0 volts, repair or replace
harness or connector between air bag sensor assembly and spiral cable. If resistance is not as specified,
repair or replace spiral cable.

DTC 14

NOTE: During testing, if codes other than DTC 14 are displayed, disregard them.

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Connect jumper wire between
D+ and D- on air bag sensor assembly connector. For connector between spiral cable and steering wheel
pad (spiral cable side), measure resistance between terminals D+ and D-. If resistance is less than 1 ohm,
go to next step. If resistance is not as specified, go to step 6).
2. Connect connector to air bag sensor assembly. Connect jumper wire between D+ and D- of connector
between spiral cable and steering wheel pad (spiral cable side). Connect negative battery cable and wait at
least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear codes.
See CLEARING CODES . Go to next step.
3. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON
position and wait at least 20 seconds. Use Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) to connect terminals Tc
and E1 of DLC1. See Fig. 14 . If DTC 14 is displayed, replace air bag sensor assembly. If DTC 14 is not
displayed, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition to LOCK. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds. Connect steering
wheel pad connector. Connect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch to
ACC or ON position and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Turn ignition
to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Go to next step.
5. Turn ignition to ACC or ON and wait at least 20 seconds. Use Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) to
connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. If DTC 14 is displayed, replace steering wheel pad. If DTC 14 is
not displayed, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD CHECK and go to next step.
6. Disconnect connector between air bag sensor assembly and spiral cable. For connector between spiral
cable and steering wheel pad (spiral cable side), measure resistance between D+ and D-. If resistance is
less than 1 ohm, go to next step. If resistance is not as specified, repair or replace spiral cable.
7. Connect jumper wire between D+ and D- on air bag sensor assembly. For connector between air bag
sensor assembly and spiral cable (air bag sensor assembly side), measure resistance between D+ and D-.
If resistance is less than 1 ohm, malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD CHECK . If
resistance is not as specified, replace harness or connector between air bag sensor assembly and spiral
cable.

DTC 31
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

NOTE: If a code other than DTC 31 is displayed at same time as DTC 31, repair the fault
indicated by code other than DTC 31. Clear codes and retest.

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Turn ignition switch on.
Measure voltage between terminals IG2 and ACC of air bag sensor assembly and body ground. If voltage
is less than 16 volts, go to next step. If voltage is not as specified, check battery and charging system.
2. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Turn ignition to LOCK and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn
ignition to ACC or ON position and wait for at least 20 seconds. Repeat ignition switch LOCK and ON
cycle at least 5 times. Connect Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) between terminals Tc and E1 of
DLC1. See Fig. 14 . If DTC 31 is displayed, replace air bag sensor assembly. If DTC 31 is not displayed,
malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD CHECK and go to next step.
3. Check air bag warning light for proper system function, see SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK . If
warning light does not indicate fault in SRS, system is OK, no further action necessary. If warning light
indicates fault in SRS, go to appropriate procedure for system diagnosis.

DTC 54

NOTE: During testing, if codes other than DTC 54 are displayed, disregard them.

1. Disable SRS. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM . Connect jumper wire between
P+ and P- on air bag sensor assembly connector. For connector between air bag sensor assembly and
passenger-side air bag assembly (air bag sensor assembly side), measure resistance between P+ and P-. If
resistance is less than 1 ohm, go to next step. If resistance is not as specified, repair or replace harness or
connector between air bag sensor and passenger-side air bag assembly.
2. Connect connector to air bag sensor assembly. Connect jumper wire between P+ and P- of connector
between air bag sensor and passenger-side air bag assembly (air bag sensor assembly side). Reconnect
negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position and wait
at least 20 seconds. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Go to next step.
3. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON
position and wait at least 20 seconds. Connect Diagnosis Check Wire (09843-18020) between terminals
Tc and E1 of DLC1. See Fig. 14 . If DTC 54 is not displayed, go to next step. If DTC 54 is displayed,
replace air bag sensor assembly.
4. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position. Disconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 90 seconds.
Connect passenger-side air bag connector. Reconnect negative battery cable and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch to LOCK position and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON
position and wait at least 20 seconds. Clear codes. See CLEARING CODES . Go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch to LOCK position and wait at least 20 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON
position and wait at least 20 seconds. Connect diagnosis wire between terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1. See
Fig. 14 . If DTC 54 is displayed, replace passenger-side air bag assembly. If DTC 54 is not displayed,
malfunction is normal, see SIMULATION METHOD CHECK and go to next step.
6. Check air bag warning light for proper system function, see SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK . If
warning light does not indicate fault in SRS, system is OK, no further action necessary. If warning light
indicates fault in SRS, go to appropriate procedure for system diagnosis.

AIR BAG SENSOR CONNECTOR TERMINAL


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Terminal Circuit
A Electrical Connection Check Mechanism
B Electrical Connection Check Mechanism
1 (P-) Passenger-Side Squib (-)
2 (P+) Passenger-Side Squib (+)
3 (D-) Driver-Side Squib (-)
4 (D+) Driver-Side Squib (+)
5 (E1) Ground
6 (E2) Ground
7 (Tc) Diagnosis
8 (LA) SRS Warning Light
9 (IG2) Power Source (IGN Fuse)
10 (ACC) Power Source (CIG Fuse)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Air Bag Sensor Screw 15 (21)
Passenger-Side Air Bag Bolt 15 (21)
Steering Wheel Nut 25 (34)
INCH Lbs. (N.m)
Steering Wheel Pad Torx Screw 78 (9)

WIRING DIAGRAM

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1997-98 ACCESSORIES/SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lexus - Air Bag Restraint System

Fig. 17: SRS Wiring Diagram

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:10:54 PM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS

Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

APPLICATION
TRANSMISSION APPLICATIONS
Vehicle Model Transmission Model
Lexus
LX 450 (1997) A-343F
LX 470 (1998-99) A-343F
Toyota
Land Cruiser A-343F
Tacoma
2WD 4-Cyl. & V6 A-340E
4WD 4-Cyl. & V6 A-340F
T100
2WD 4-Cyl. & V6 A-340E
4WD V6 A-340F
4Runner
2WD 4-Cyl. & V6 A-340E
4WD 4-Cyl. & V6 A-340F

CAUTION: Models are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When
servicing vehicle, use care to avoid accidental air bag deployment. All SRS
electrical connections and wiring harness are covered by Yellow
insulation. SRS-related components are located in steering column, center
console, instrument panel and lower panel on instrument panel. DO NOT
use electrical test equipment on these circuits. If necessary, deactivate
SRS before servicing components. See AIR BAG DEACTIVATION
PROCEDURES article in GENERAL INFORMATION.

IDENTIFICATION
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is used for current application of component parts and assemblies. VIN is
stamped on vehicle identification plate, located at top left corner of dash, and on certification label, located on
driver's door jam.

GEAR RATIOS

GEAR RATIOS
Gear Ratio
1st 2.804
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:30
8:28:25 AM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd 1.531
3rd 1.000
OD .705
Reverse 2.393

DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION

All A-340 series automatic transmissions are 4-speed Electronic Controlled Transmissions (ECT). Solenoids
that control shifts are located in valve body. Transmission consists of lock-up type torque converter, OD direct
clutch, direct clutch, forward clutch, 2nd brake, 2nd coast brake, OD brake, overdrive planetary gear unit,
planetary gear unit, hydraulic control system and electronic control system. See Fig. 1 .

Solenoids are controlled by an Electronic Controlled Transmission (ECT) Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
Control unit is referred to as the ECT ECU. For electronic diagnosis, see appropriate ELECTRONIC
CONTROLS article. ECT ECU receives information from various input devices and uses this information to
control solenoids for transmission shifting and lock-up solenoid for torque converter lock-up.

An Overdrive (OD) switch is mounted on shift lever. When OD switch is depressed to ON position,
transmission will shift into 4th gear when shift lever is in "D" position, and OD OFF light on instrument panel
will go off. When OD switch is released to OFF position, transmission will shift into 3rd gear, and OD OFF
light on instrument panel will illuminate.

A pattern select switch is located near shift lever on center console. Pattern select switch contains a POWER
(PWR) and a NORMAL operating position. When pattern select switch is depressed (PWR position),
transmission upshifts and downshifts will occur at a higher vehicle speed than with switch released. An
indicator light on instrument panel indicates pattern select switch is in PWR (on) position. On some models,
pattern select switch may include a 2nd start switch. Transmission starts out in 2nd gear when 2nd start switch
is activated.

A-340F and A-343F transmission has a mechanically controlled 2-speed 4WD transfer case. Transfer case
consists of planetary gears, hydraulic clutches and hydraulic brake. Transfer case is mounted to rear of
transmission case.

Transmission is equipped with a shift lock and key lock system. Shift lock system prevents shift lever from
being moved from Park unless brake pedal is depressed. Key lock system prevents ignition key from being
moved from ACC to LOCK position on ignition switch unless shift lever is in Park. For more information on
shift lock and key lock system, see TOYOTA & LEXUS SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM article.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 1: Identifying Transmission Component Locations


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

LUBRICATION
For transmission refill capacities, see TRANSMISSION CAPACITIES table.

TRANSMISSION CAPACITIES
Application Qts. (L)
Lexus
LX 450 & LX 470
Drain & Refill 2.1 (2.0)
Dry Refill 12.0 (11.7)
Toyota
Land Cruiser
Drain & Refill 2.1 (2.0)
Dry Refill 12.0 (11.7)
Tacoma
A-340E
Drain & Refill 1.7 (1.6)
Dry Refill 7.6 (7.2)
A-340F
Drain & Refill 2.1 (2.0)
Dry Refill 10.7 (10.1)
T100
A-340E
Drain & Refill 1.7 (1.6)
Dry Refill 7.6 (7.2)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

A-340F
Drain & Refill 2.1 (2.0)
Dry Refill 8.0 (7.6)
4Runner
A-340E
Drain & Refill 1.7 (1.6)
Dry Refill 7.6 (7.2)
A-340F
Drain & Refill 2.1 (2.0)
Dry Refill 10.8 (10.2)

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
DRIVE AXLE SHAFTS

See appropriate AXLE SHAFTS article in AXLE SHAFTS & TRANSFER CASES.

TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY

Removal

1. Drain fluid. Remove oil pan, filler tube, gasket, oil filter and magnets from oil pan. Disconnect
connectors from each solenoid. Remove solenoid wiring and stopper plate.
2. Note location of oil tubes. Using screwdrivers, pry at both ends of oil tubes and remove oil tubes.
Remove transmission fluid temperature sensor (if applicable). Remove valve body bolts. Note location
and bolt length. See Fig. 2 .
3. Lower valve body slightly and remove accumulator piston springs. Note location of springs. Disconnect
throttle cable from valve body cam. Remove valve body. Use care not to lose check ball and spring
located above valve body (if equipped).

NOTE: During valve body removal, note location of accumulator piston springs, oil
tubes, bolt length and location, check ball and spring (if equipped). Component
locations should be marked for reassembly reference.

Installation

1. To install, reverse removal procedure. Ensure check ball and spring are installed above valve body (if
equipped). Ensure manual shift lever in transmission case aligns with manual valve of valve body.
2. Install accumulator piston springs and spacers in original location. See TRANSMISSION
REASSEMBLY . Proper length bolts must be installed in designated areas. See Fig. 2 . Use NEW "O"
ring on solenoid, oil filter and gasket if necessary. Ensure oil tubes do not contact oil pan. Install magnets
in oil pan. Install pan with NEW gasket. Fill fluid to proper level.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 2: Identifying Valve Body Mounting Bolts (A-340 Series Models)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

PARKING LOCK PAWL

Removal & Installation

Remove valve body. Remove parking lock pawl bracket. Disconnect parking lock rod from manual valve lever
on A-340E and A-340F models. On all models, note location of shaft spring. Remove shaft spring from shaft.
Remove shaft and parking lock pawl. Remove "E" ring from shaft. To install, reverse removal procedure.

EXTENSION HOUSING & SENSOR ROTOR (A-340E)

Removal

1. Raise and support vehicle. Place reference marks on drive shaft and companion flange. Remove drive
shaft and center bearing assembly.
2. Remove front exhaust pipe and converter. Disconnect speedometer cable. Remove speedometer driven
gear and speed sensor from extension housing.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

3. Using jack, support transmission. Remove ground cable and rear support member from extension
housing. Remove extension housing bolts. Note bolt length and location. Remove extension housing.
4. If sensor rotor is to be replaced, remove snap ring, speedometer drive gear and lock ball from output
shaft. Use care not to lose lock ball when removing drive gear. Remove sensor rotor.

Cleaning & Inspection

Clean components with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect components for damage. Measure inside
diameter of extension housing bushing bore. Replace extension housing if inside diameter exceeds
1.578" (40.09 mm).

Installation

Install sensor rotor on output shaft, ensuring key is installed in groove. Install extension housing using a NEW
housing gasket. Apply sealant to extension housing bolt threads prior to installation. Shorter mounting bolts go
on bottom of extension housing. To complete installation, reverse removal procedure.

THROTTLE CABLE

Removal

Disconnect throttle cable from cam. Remove transmission valve body. See TRANSMISSION VALVE
BODY . Pull out throttle cable.

Installation

1. Install throttle cable in transmission case. Ensure cable is fully seated. Install valve body. Connect throttle
cable to cam. New cables do not have cable stopper installed. To make adjustment possible, stake stopper
as described.
2. Pull inner cable lightly until a slight resistance is felt. Stake stopper 0-.04" (0-1.0 mm) on Tacoma,
or .031-.059" (.80-1.50 mm) on all other models, from end of outer cable. See Fig. 3 . Connect throttle
cable on throttle linkage. Adjust throttle cable. See appropriate AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SERVICING article in TRANSMISSION SERVICING. Test drive vehicle.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 3: Staking Throttle Cable Stopper


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TROUBLE SHOOTING

NOTE: See appropriate ELECTRONIC CONTROLS article for trouble shooting


solenoids, sensors and computer control unit. Ensure transmission fluid level
is correct before diagnosing transmission.

PRELIMINARY CHECKS

Ensure fluid level is correct. Inspect and adjust throttle cable, shift linkage and park/neutral position switch (if
necessary). Check idle speed RPM and adjust as necessary.

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Fluid Discolored Or Smells Burnt

Fluid contaminated. Torque converter or transmission faulty.

No Movement In Any Gear

Shift linkage out of adjustment. Faulty valve body or primary regulator. Parking lock pawl faulty. Faulty torque
converter. Converter drive plate damaged or broken. Oil pump intake screen blocked. ECT computer faulty.
Control shaft lever out of adjustment. Faulty OD one-way clutch, OD brake, OD direct clutch or OD planetary
gear.

Selector Lever Position Incorrect

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Shift linkage out of adjustment. Faulty manual valve and lever.

Harsh Engagement Into Any Drive Range

Throttle cable out of adjustment. Faulty valve body, primary regulator or accumulator pistons. Faulty OD brake,
OD direct clutch, OD planetary gear unit or torque converter. Faulty 1st and reverse brake, direct clutch or
forward clutch.

Delayed 1-2, 2-3 Or 3-OD Upshifts, Or Downshifts From OD-3 Or 3-2, Then Changes Back To OD Or 3rd

Faulty valve body, ECT ECU or solenoid valve.

Slips On Any Upshift Or Slips Or Shudders On Acceleration

Shift linkage or throttle cable out of adjustment. Faulty valve body or solenoid valve.

Drag Or Binding On Upshifts

Shift linkage out of adjustment or faulty valve body.

No Lock-Up In 2nd, 3rd Or OD

Faulty valve body, solenoid valve or electronic control unit.

Harsh Downshift

Throttle cable out of adjustment or faulty. Accumulator pistons or valve body faulty.

No Downshift When Coasting

Faulty valve body, electronic control or solenoid valve.

Downshifts Too Soon Or Too Late When Coasting

Throttle cable out of adjustment or faulty. Faulty valve body, electronic control or solenoid valve.

No OD-4, OD-3, 3-2 Or 2-1 Kickdown

Faulty valve body, electronic control or solenoid valve faulty.

No Engine Braking In "2" Or "L" Range

Faulty valve body, electronic control or solenoid valve.

Vehicle Does Not Move In "R" Range

Faulty 2nd coast brake, front and rear planetary gear unit or direct clutch. Faulty 1st and reverse brake. Faulty
OD direct clutch.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Vehicle Does Not Move In "D", "2" Or "L" Range

Faulty forward clutch. Faulty No. 2 one-way clutch. Faulty 1st and reverse brake. Faulty 2nd coast brake, direct
clutch or 2nd brake.

No Upshift 1-2, 2-3, 3-OD, 3-4, 4-OD

Faulty 2nd brake or No. 1 one-way clutch. Faulty direct clutch. Faulty OD brake.

No Downshift 2-1

Faulty 2nd coast brake. Faulty 2nd brake.

No Lock-Up Or No Lock-Up Off

Faulty torque converter or solenoid.

Slip Or Shudder In "D", "R", 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Or OD

Faulty torque converter, OD one-way clutch or OD direct clutch. Faulty 1st and reverse brake or direct clutch.
Faulty forward clutch or No. 2 one-way clutch. Faulty 2nd brake, 2nd coast brake or No. 1 one-way clutch.
Faulty OD brake.

No Engine Braking 1st-3rd

Faulty OD direct clutch, 1st and reverse brake or 2nd coast brake.

Poor Acceleration

Faulty torque converter, OD direct clutch, OD planetary gear unit or OD brake. Faulty 2nd coast brake, direct
clutch, 2nd brake or 1st and reverse brake. Faulty forward clutch.

Engine Stalls When Starting Off Or Stopping

Faulty torque converter.

Vehicle Does Not Hold In "P" Range

Shift linkage faulty or out of adjustment. Defective parking lock pawl assembly.

No Transfer Case Gear Changes On 4WD Models

Transfer linkage out of adjustment. Faulty transfer case.

CLUTCH & BAND APPLICATION


Selector Lever Position Elements In Use
"D" (Drive)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

1st Gear Forward Clutch, No. 2 One-Way


Clutch, OD One-Way Clutch &
OD Direct Clutch
2nd Gear Forward Clutch, No. 1 One-Way
Clutch, 2nd Brake, OD Direct
Clutch & OD One-Way Clutch
3rd Gear Forward Clutch, 2nd Brake,
Direct Clutch, OD Direct Clutch
& OD One-Way Clutch
OD (4th Gear) Forward Clutch, 2nd Brake, OD
Brake & Direct Clutch
"2" (Intermediate)
1st Gear Forward Clutch, No. 2 One-Way
Clutch OD Direct Clutch & OD
One-Way Clutch
2nd Gear Forward Clutch, 2nd Coast
Brake, 2nd Brake, No. 1 One-
Way Clutch, OD Direct Clutch
& OD One-Way Clutch
3rd Gear (1) Forward Clutch, OD Direct
Clutch, Direct Clutch 2nd Brake
& OD One-Way Clutch
"L" (Low)
1st Gear Forward Clutch, OD One-Way
Clutch, No. 2 One-Way Clutch,
OD Direct Clutch & 1st &
Reverse Brake
2nd Gear (2) Forward Clutch, 2nd Coast
Brake, 2nd Brake, No. 1 One-
Way Clutch, OD Direct Clutch
& OD One-Way Clutch
"R" (Reverse) OD Direct Clutch, Direct Clutch,
OD One-Way Clutch & 1st &
Reverse Brake
"N" (Neutral) OD Direct Clutch
"P" (Park) OD Direct Clutch
(1) Downshift only in "2" range and 3rd gear. No upshift.

(2) Downshift only in "L" range and 2nd gear. No upshift.

TESTING
ELECTRICAL TESTING

Electrical tests should be performed prior to hydraulic testing to ensure problem is not in electrical circuit. See
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

appropriate ELECTRONIC CONTROLS article.

PRELIMINARY CHECKS

Before testing transmission and transfer case, perform following procedures:

 Ensure fluid level is correct.


 Inspect and adjust throttle cable.
 Ensure battery is fully charged for accurate testing.
 Adjust shift linkage.
 Adjust park/neutral position switch.
 Inspect idle speed RPM.

TIME LAG TEST

Test Procedure

1. Engine and transmission must be at normal operating temperature. Start engine and ensure idle RPM is
within specification. See IDLE SPEED SPECIFICATIONS table. On 4Runner and T100 models, place
transfer gear shift selector in "H2".
2. On all models, apply service and parking brakes. Using stop watch, measure time until engagement shock
is felt when lever is shifted from "N" to "D". Allow one minute interval between tests. Perform time
measurements 2 more times and calculate average value. Time should be less than 1.2 seconds.
3. Use same procedure to test time lag when gear selector is moved from "N" to "R". Time lag should be
less than 1.5 seconds.

Test Results

1. If "N" to "D" time lag exceeds specification, check for low main line pressure, worn forward clutch or
overdrive one-way clutch not operating correctly.
2. If "N" to "R" time lag exceeds specification, check for low main line pressure, worn direct clutch, worn
1st and reverse brake or overdrive one-way clutch not operating correctly.

IDLE SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1) (2)


Vehicle Transmission RPM
Lexus
LX 450 A-343F 650
LX 470 A-343F 700
Toyota
Land Cruiser A-343F 650
Tacoma & T100
4-Cyl. A-340E 700
V6 A-340E & A-340F 700

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

4Runner
4-Cyl. A-340E & A-340F 700
V6 A-340E & A-340F 700
(1) Plus or minus 50 RPM.

(2) Check idle speed in Neutral range with A/C off.

ROAD TEST

CAUTION: Perform test at normal operating fluid temperature of 122-176°F (50-80°C).

Test Procedure

Before road testing, note following information:

 No overdrive upshift or lock-up will occur when engine coolant is below 140°F (60°C) on Lexus models.
 No 3rd upshift or lock-up will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 95°F (35°C) and speed is
below 25 MPH on Lexus models.
 No overdrive upshift or lock-up will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 133°F (55°C) on
Land Cruiser or below 140°F (60°C) on Tacoma, T100 and 4Runner models.
 No overdrive upshift or lock-up will occur if a 6 MPH difference between set cruise control speed and
actual speed exists on all models.
 All shift points vary due to transfer case gear position on Tacoma, T100 and 4Runner models.
 Overdrive gear and lock-up are cancelled when transfer case is engaged in L4 on Tacoma, T100 and
4Runner models.

"D" Range Test in NORM Or PWR Pattern Ranges

1. Shift into "D". Hold accelerator at constant full throttle position. Check 1-2, 2-3 and 3-OD upshift points.
See appropriate SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS table.
 If no 1st-2nd gear upshift occurs, 1-2 shift valve or No. 2 solenoid is stuck.

 If no 2nd-3rd gear upshift occurs, 2-3 shift valve or No. 1 solenoid is stuck.

 If no 3-OD gear upshift occurs, 3-4 shift valve is stuck.

 If all shift points are incorrect, throttle, 1-2 shift, 2-3 shift and 3-OD shift valves are defective.

 If all lock-up points are incorrect, lock-up control valve, lock-up signal valve or lock-up solenoid is
stuck.
2. Use procedure outlined in step 1) to check shock and slip between 1-2 gear, 2-3 gear and 3-OD gear
upshifts. Excessive shock can be caused by excessive line pressure, defective accumulator or defective
check ball.
3. Run in OD or lock-up in "D" range. Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Noise and vibration may be
caused by unbalanced drive shaft, differential, torque converter or other drive train components.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

4. While running in "D" range, 2nd, 3rd and OD gears, check correct kickdown speed for 2-1, 3-2 and OD-3
gears. Check for abnormal shock and slip at kickdown.
5. Check lock-up mechanism. Drive in OD gear of "D" range, at steady speed (lock-up ON) of 47 MPH for
4Runner, Tacoma and T100 models, and 59 MPH for Land Cruiser, LX 450 and LX 470 models. Lightly
depress accelerator pedal. Ensure engine RPM does not change abruptly. Large increase in engine RPM
indicates there is no lock-up.

"2" Range Test

1. Shift to "2" range. Drive with accelerator pedal held constant at full throttle. Push in one pattern selection
button. Ensure 1-2 upshift points at each accelerator opening take place and are operating properly.

NOTE: There is no OD upshift and lock-up in "2" range. To prevent overrun,


transmission upshifts into 3rd gear at 62 MPH for 4Runner.

2. While driving in "2" range, 2nd gear, release accelerator pedal and check engine braking. If there is no
engine braking, second coast brake is defective. Check for abnormal noise and shock at acceleration and
deceleration.

"L" Range Test

While running in "L" range, ensure there is no upshift to 2nd gear. While running in "L" range, release
accelerator pedal. If there is no engine braking effect, 1st and reverse brake is defective. Note abnormal noise at
acceleration and deceleration.

"R" Range Test

Shift into "R" range. Accelerate vehicle from a stop at full throttle. Ensure slipping does not occur.

"P" Range Test

Stop vehicle on 5 degree or more gradient. Shift transmission into "P". Release parking brake. Ensure parking
pawl holds vehicle.

SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS

LAND CRUISER & LX 450 A-343F (1997) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range
1st-2nd 35-39
2nd-3rd 64-71
3rd-OD 94-101
OD-3rd 90-97
3rd-2nd 59-63
2nd-1st 26-29
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

"2" Range (2)


3rd-2nd 72-79
"L" Range
2nd-1st 38-39
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) No 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift with 2nd start switch on.

LAND CRUISER & LX 450 A-343F (1997) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (2) (NORM Or PWR)
Lock-Up ON 48-52
Lock-Up OFF 42-46
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

LAND CRUISER & LX 470 A-343F (1998-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range
1st-2nd 34-37
2nd-3rd 63-69
3rd-OD 95-103
OD-3rd 91-98
3rd-2nd 58-62
2nd-1st 27-30
"2" Range (2)
3rd-2nd 70-76
"L" Range
2nd-1st 34-39
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) No 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift with 2nd start switch on.

LAND CRUISER & LX 470 A-343F (1998-99) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (2) (NORM Or PWR)
Lock-Up ON 38-41
Lock-Up OFF 34-39
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

4RUNNER 2.7L 2WD A-340E (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-40
2nd-3rd (1) 66-72
3rd-OD (1) 88-94
3rd-OD (2) 21-24
OD-3rd (2) 16-19
OD-3rd (1) 84-90
3rd-2nd (1) 61-67
2nd-1st (1) 29-32
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-40
3rd-2nd (1) 70-75
2nd-1st (1) 29-32
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
2nd-1st (1) 34-37
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

4RUNNER 2.7L 2WD A-340E (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 48-52
Lock-Up OFF In OD 43-47
"D" Range (PWR)
Lock-Up ON In OD 52-55
Lock-Up OFF In OD 43-47
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

4RUNNER 3.4L 2WD A-340E (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

1st-2nd (1) 37-40


2nd-3rd (1) 70-75
3rd-OD (1) 94-99
3rd-OD (2) 27-30
OD-3rd (2) 14-17
OD-3rd (1) 89-94
3rd-2nd (1) 64-69
2nd-1st (1) 29-32
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 37-40
3rd-2nd (1) 74-79
2nd-1st (1) 29-32
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
2nd-1st (1) 36-39
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

4RUNNER 3.4L 2WD A-340E (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON in OD 47-50
Lock-Up OFF in OD 42-45
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

4RUNNER 2.7L 4WD A-340F (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 34-38
2nd-3rd (1) 63-69
3rd-OD (1) 83-90
3rd-OD (2) 20-23
OD-3rd (2) 15-18
OD-3rd (1) 79-86
3rd-2nd (1) 58-64

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd-1st (1) 27-30


"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 34-38
3rd-2nd (1) 65-72
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
2nd-1st (1) 32-35
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

4RUNNER 2.7L 4WD A-340F (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON in OD 48-52
Lock-Up OFF in OD 44-48
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

4RUNNER 3.4L 4WD A-340F (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-39
2nd-3rd (1) 66-73
3rd-OD (1) 89-97
3rd-OD (2) 25-29
OD-3rd (2) 14-17
OD-3rd (1) 85-93
3rd-2nd (1) 61-68
2nd-1st (1) 28-32
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-39
3rd-2nd (1) 71-78
2nd-1st (1) 28-32
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
2nd-1st (1) 34-38

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

4RUNNER 3.4L 4WD A-340F (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON in OD 45-48
Lock-Up OFF in OD 40-44
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (P255/75R15 TIRES) A-340E (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 33-36
2nd-3rd (1) 60-65
3rd-OD (1) 84-89
3rd-OD (2) 21-23
OD-3rd (2) 15-18
OD-3rd (1) 80-86
3rd-2nd (1) 55-59
2nd-1st (1) 26-29
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 33-36
3rd-2nd (1) 66-72
2nd-1st (1) 26-29
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 57-62
2nd-1st (1) 32-35
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340E (1999) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd-3rd (1) 63-68


3rd-OD (1) 89-94
3rd-OD (2) 22-24
OD-3rd (2) 16-19
OD-3rd (1) 85-90
3rd-2nd (1) 59-62
2nd-1st (1) 28-30
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
3rd-2nd (1) 71-75
2nd-1st (1) 28-30
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 60-65
2nd-1st (1) 34-37
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (P255/75R15 TIRES) A-340E (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 48-52
Lock-Up OFF In OD 45-48
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340E (1999) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 52-54
Lock-Up OFF In OD 47-50
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340E (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

1st-2nd (1) 32-35


2nd-3rd (1) 58-63
3rd-OD (1) 82-87
3rd-OD (2) 20-22
OD-3rd (2) 15-17
OD-3rd (1) 78-83
3rd-2nd (1) 54-57
2nd-1st (1) 25-28
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 32-35
3rd-2nd (1) 65-70
2nd-1st (1) 25-28
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 55-60
2nd-1st (1) 31-34
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 OR P265/70R16 TIRES) A-340E (1999) SHIFT SPEED


SPECIFICATIONS
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
2nd-3rd (1) 62-67
3rd-OD (1) 88-93
3rd-OD (2) 21-24
OD-3rd (2) 16-19
OD-3rd (1) 84-88
3rd-2nd (1) 58-61
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
3rd-2nd (1) 70-74
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 59-64
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd-1st (1) 34-36


(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340E (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 47-50
Lock-Up OFF In OD 44-47
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 OR P265/70R16 TIRES) A-340E (1999) LOCK-UP SPEED


SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 51-53
Lock-Up OFF In OD 47-49
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 3.4L A-340E (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 40-43
2nd-3rd (1) 75-81
3rd-OD (1) 101-107
3rd-OD (2) 29-32
OD-3rd (2) 16-19
OD-3rd (1) 96-102
3rd-2nd (1) 69-75
2nd-1st (1) 32-35
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 40-43
3rd-2nd (1) 80-85
2nd-1st (1) 32-35
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

"L" Range (NORM or PWR)


3rd-2nd (1) 68-73
2nd-1st (1) 38-42
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 3.4L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340E (1999) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
2nd-3rd (1) 65-71
3rd-OD (1) 88-94
3rd-OD (2) 25-29
OD-3rd (2) 14-16
OD-3rd (1) 84-90
3rd-2nd (1) 60-66
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
3rd-2nd (1) 70-75
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 59-65
2nd-1st (1) 34-37
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 3.4L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340E (1999) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-39
2nd-3rd (1) 68-73
3rd-OD (1) 91-97
3rd-OD (2) 26-29
OD-3rd (2) 14-18
87-93
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

OD-3rd (1)
3rd-2nd (1) 62-68
2nd-1st (1) 29-31
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-39
3rd-2nd (1) 72-78
2nd-1st (1) 29-31
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 62-68
2nd-1st (1) 35-38
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 3.4L A-340E (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 50-53
Lock-Up OFF In OD 45-49
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 3.4L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340E & A-340F (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED
SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 44-47
Lock-Up OFF In OD 40-43
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 3.4L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340E & A-340F (1997-99) LOCK-UP SPEED
SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 45-48
Lock-Up OFF In OD 41-44

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340F (1999) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 33-36
2nd-3rd (1) 60-65
3rd-OD (1) 84-89
3rd-OD (2) 21-23
OD-3rd (2) 15-18
OD-3rd (1) 80-86
3rd-2nd (1) 55-59
2nd-1st (1) 26-29
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 33-36
3rd-2nd (1) 66-72
2nd-1st (1) 26-29
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 57-62
2nd-1st (1) 32-35
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340F (1999) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 32-35
2nd-3rd (1) 58-63
3rd-OD (1) 82-87
3rd-OD (2) 20-22
OD-3rd (2) 15-17
OD-3rd (1) 78-83
3rd-2nd (1) 54-57
2nd-1st (1) 25-28

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

"2" Range (NORM or PWR)


1st-2nd (1) 32-35
3rd-2nd (1) 65-70
2nd-1st (1) 15-28
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 55-60
2nd-1st (1) 31-34
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 2.7L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340F (1999) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 48-52
Lock-Up OFF In OD 45-48
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 2.7L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340F (1999) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)
Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR) (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 47-50
Lock-Up OFF In OD 44-47
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

TACOMA 3.4L (P225/75R15 TIRES) A-340F (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
2nd-3rd (1) 65-71
3rd-OD (1) 88-94
3rd-OD (2) 25-29
OD-3rd (2) 14-16
OD-3rd (1) 84-90
3rd-2nd (1) 60-66
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd-1st (1) 27-30


"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 35-38
3rd-2nd (1) 70-75
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 59-65
2nd-1st (1) 34-37
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

TACOMA 3.4L (31X10.5R15 TIRES) A-340F (1997-99) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-39
2nd-3rd (1) 68-73
3rd-OD (1) 91-97
3rd-OD (2) 26-29
OD-3rd (2) 14-18
OD-3rd (1) 87-93
3rd-2nd (1) 62-68
2nd-1st (1) 29-31
"2" Range (NORM or PWR)
1st-2nd (1) 36-39
3rd-2nd (1) 72-78
2nd-1st (1) 29-31
"L" Range (NORM or PWR)
3rd-2nd (1) 62-68
2nd-1st (1) 35-38
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

T100 2.7L 2WD A-340E (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2nd-3rd (1) 62-67


3rd-OD (1) 79-85
3rd-OD (2) 21-24
OD-3rd (2) 16-19
OD-3rd (1) 75-81
3rd-2nd (1) 57-61
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"2" Range
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
3rd-2nd (1) 68-75
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range
2nd-1st (1) 33-36
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

T100 2.7L 2WD A-340E (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 52-55
Lock-Up OFF In OD 44-47
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

T100 3.4L 2WD A-340E (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range
1st-2nd (1) 35-39
2nd-3rd (1) 67-73
3rd-OD (1) 91-96
3rd-OD (2) 27-30
OD-3rd (2) 14-17
OD-3rd (1) 86-92
3rd-2nd (1) 62-67
2nd-1st (1) 29-32

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

"2" Range
1st-2nd (1) 35-39
3rd-2nd (1) 71-77
2nd-1st (1) 29-32
"L" Range
2nd-1st (1) 32-36
(1) Wide open throttle.

(2) Fully closed throttle.

T100 3.4L 2WD A-340E (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 49-52
Lock-Up OFF In OD 45-48
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

T100 3.4L 4WD A-340F (1997-98) SHIFT SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Application MPH
"D" Range
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
2nd-3rd (1) 64-69
3rd-OD (1) 86-91
3rd-OD (2) 26-29
OD-3rd (2) 13-16
OD-3rd (1) 83-88
3rd-2nd (1) 59-64
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"2" Range
1st-2nd (1) 34-37
3rd-2nd (1) 68-73
2nd-1st (1) 27-30
"L" Range
2nd-1st (1) 33-36
(1) Wide open throttle.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

(2) Fully closed throttle.

T100 3.4L 4WD A-340F (1997-98) LOCK-UP SPEED SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application MPH
"D" Range (2)
Lock-Up ON In OD 47-50
Lock-Up OFF In OD 42-45
(1) Throttle valve opened 5 percent.

(2) No lock-up in "L" or "2" range.

STALL SPEED TEST

Test Procedure

1. Operate engine and transmission at normal operating temperature. Connect scan tool to DLC3, located
under instrument panel. Apply parking brake and block front wheels.

CAUTION: DO NOT maintain stall RPM for more than 5 seconds. Allow engine to
idle for one minute between tests to allow fluid to cool.

2. On Tacoma, 4Runner and T100 4WD models, place transfer case in "H2" position. On all models, start
engine, apply brake pedal and place transmission in "D". Accelerate engine to full throttle and note
maximum RPM obtained. Repeat test in "R". Compare reading obtained to specification. See STALL
SPEED SPECIFICATIONS table.

Stall Test Results

1. If stall speed is the same for both ranges but lower than specification, engine output may be insufficient
or stator one-way clutch may not be operating properly.

NOTE: If stall RPM is more than 600 RPM below specifications, torque converter
may be faulty.

2. Stall speed exceeding specification in "D" range may be caused by a slipping forward clutch, defective
No. 2 or overdrive one-way clutch, low main line pressure or transfer case direct clutch slipping.
3. Stall speeds exceeding specification in "R" range may be caused by a low main line pressure, direct
clutch slipping, 1st and reverse brake slipping, overdrive one-way clutch defective or transfer case direct
clutch slipping.
4. Stall speeds exceeding specification in both ranges may be caused by a low main line pressure, improper
fluid level or defective overdrive one-way clutch.

STALL SPEED SPECIFICATIONS


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Vehicle Transmission Stall RPM


Lexus
LX 450 A-343F 1800-2100
LX 470 A-343F 2150-2450
Toyota
Land Cruiser
1997 A-343F 1800-2100
1998 A-343F 2150-2450
Tacoma & T100
1997
4-Cyl. A-340E 1800-2100
V6 A-340E & A-340F 2000-2300
1998
4-Cyl. A-340E 1800-2100
V6 A-340E & A-340F 2100-2400
4Runner
4-Cyl. A-340E & A-340F 1850-2150
V6 A-340E & A-340F 2100-2400

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST

NOTE: Hydraulic pressure test should be performed with transmission fluid


temperature of 122-176°F (50-80°C).

1. Ensure transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. Remove plug from right side of
transmission case and install appropriate pressure gauge.
2. Apply parking and service brakes. Start engine. Ensure idle speed is within manufacturer's specifications.
Place transmission in "D" range.
3. Check main line pressure at engine idle. Repeat procedure in "R" range. Compare all readings to
specification. See appropriate A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS table.
4. Check main line pressure at full throttle (stall speed). Read highest pressure when engine reaches stall
speed. Repeat procedure in "R" range. Compare all readings to specification. See appropriate A-340
SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS table.

Main Line Pressure Test Results

1. If line pressure in all ranges exceeds specification, check for defective regulator valve, defective throttle
valve or throttle cable out of adjustment.
2. If line pressure is below specification in all ranges, check for defective oil pump, defective regulator
valve, defective throttle valve, throttle cable out of adjustment or defective OD direct clutch.
3. If line pressure is below specification in "D" range only, check for defective forward clutch, fluid leak in
"D" range circuit or defective OD clutch.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

4. If line pressure is low in "R" range only, check for defective direct clutch, fluid leak in "R" range or
defective 1st and reverse brake.

A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER)


"D" Range - psi "R" Range - psi
Application (kg/cm2 ) (kg/cm2 )
1997
Idle Speed 61-70 (4.3-4.9) 74-88 (5.2-6.2)
Stall Speed 186-222 (13.1-15.6) 229-280 (16.1-19.7)
1998-99
Idle Speed 70-78 (4.9-5.5) 101-115 (7.1-8.1)
Stall Speed 188-208 (13.2-14.6) 240-287 (16.9-20.2)

A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS (LX 450 - 1997)


Application "D" Range - psi (kg/cm2 ) "R" Range - psi (kg/cm2 )
Idle Speed 61-70 (4.3-4.9) 74-88 (5.2-6.2)
Stall Speed 186-222 (13.1-15.6) 229-280 (16.1-19.7)

A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS (LX 470 - 1998-99)


Application "D" Range - psi (kg/cm2 ) "R" Range - psi (kg/cm2 )
Idle Speed 70-78 (4.3-4.9) 101-115 (7.1-8.1)
Stall Speed 188-208 (13.2-14.6) 240-287 (16.9-20.2)

A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA & T100)


"D" Range - psi "R" Range - psi
Application (kg/cm2 ) (kg/cm2 )
4-Cyl. (A-340E)
Idle Speed 53-61 (3.7-4.3) 71-85 (5.0-6.0)
Stall Speed 135-171 (9.5- 188-238 (13.2-16.7)
12.0)
V6 (A-340E & A-340F)
Idle Speed 53-61 (3.7-4.3) 88-101 (6.2-7.1)
Stall Speed 131-166 (9.2- 208-282 (14.6-19.8)
11.7)

A-340 SERIES LINE PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS (4RUNNER)


Application "D" Range - psi "R" Range - psi
(kg/cm2 ) (kg/cm2 )
4-Cylinder
Idle Speed 53-61 (3.7-4.3) 88-102 (6.2-7.2)
Stall Speed 135-171 (9.5-12.0) 228-277 (16.0-

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

19.5)
V6
Idle Speed 53-61 (3.7-4.3) 88-101 (6.2-7.1)
Stall Speed 131-166 (9.2-11.7) 208-282 (14.6-
19.8)

TORQUE CONVERTER

NOTE: Torque converter is a sealed unit and is serviced as complete assembly.


Perform following tests to check for defective converter. Torque converter and
transmission cooler must be thoroughly cleaned and flushed if transmission is
contaminated.

ONE-WAY CLUTCH CHECK

1. Install turner and stopper of One-Way Clutch Tester (09350-30020) in torque converter. See Fig. 4 .
Turner fits in inner race of one-way clutch. Stopper fits in notch of converter hub and outer race of one-
way clutch.
2. Clutch should lock when turned counterclockwise, but should turn freely when rotated clockwise. Torque
required to turn clutch clockwise should be less than 22 INCH lbs. (2.5 N.m). If necessary, clean
converter and retest clutch. Replace converter if clutch still fails test.

Fig. 4: Checking Condition Of Torque Converter One-Way Clutch


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 32 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

DRIVE PLATE (FLYWHEEL) RUNOUT CHECK

Using dial indicator, measure drive plate runout. See Fig. 5 . If runout exceeds .008" (.20 mm), or if ring gear is
damaged, replace drive plate. If installing a new drive plate, note position of spacers.

Fig. 5: Measuring Drive Plate Runout


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CONVERTER SLEEVE RUNOUT CHECK

Temporarily mount torque converter to drive plate. Mount a dial indicator with needle resting on converter
sleeve. See Fig. 6 . Rotate converter. If runout exceeds .012" (.30 mm), reposition converter on drive plate and
recheck runout.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 33 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 6: Measuring Converter Sleeve Runout


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION

NOTE: For transmission removal procedure, see appropriate AUTOMATIC


TRANSMISSION REMOVAL article in TRANSMISSION SERVICING.

TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove wire harness and throttle cable clamp. Remove transmission shaft lever and park/neutral position
switch. Remove cooler line side unions. On A-340E and A-340F models, remove speedometer driven
gear or No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors (if equipped) from extension housing. On A-340F and A-343F
models, remove transmission fluid temperature sensor from right side of transmission case.
2. On A-340F and A-343F models, remove breather hose from transfer upper cover and transmission shifter
control retainer. Remove engine rear mounting. Remove dynamic damper (vibration damper) from
transfer case. Remove drive shaft upper dust cover. Unbolt and remove transfer case from transmission.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 34 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

DO NOT damage adapter rear oil seal with transfer input gear spline.
3. Remove speed sensor snap ring, sensor rotor and key. Remove transmission housing from transmission
case. On A-340E models, remove extension housing. Remove speedometer drive gear snap ring, drive
gear and lock ball from output shaft. Remove sensor rotor and key (if equipped). On A-340F and A-343F
models, remove transfer case from transmission. On all models, remove transmission oil pan. To prevent
contamination of valve body, DO NOT turn transmission over.
4. Remove oil filter and solenoid wiring. Remove oil tubes. Disconnect throttle cable from cam. Remove
valve body. Remove check ball body and spring. See Fig. 7 . Remove accumulator piston springs. Apply
air pressure to proper passages of transmission case to remove accumulator pistons. See Fig. 8 -Fig. 10 .
Remove throttle cable from transmission case.

Fig. 7: Locating Check Ball & Spring


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 35 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

5. Remove parking lock pawl bracket. Disconnect parking rod from manual valve lever. Remove "E" ring
from shaft. Carefully remove lock pawl, spring and shaft. Using chisel and hammer, cut and remove
spacer from shaft. Drive out roll pin. Remove manual valve lever shaft through transmission case.
Remove manual valve lever.
6. Remove oil pump from transmission case using appropriate puller. Remove overdrive planetary gear unit
with overdrive direct clutch from case. Remove bearing and race. See Fig. 11 . Remove overdrive
planetary ring gear. Remove bearing and race.
7. Check overdrive brake piston stroke. Install dial indicator on overdrive (OD) brake piston. Measure
stroke by applying 57-114 psi (4-8 kg/cm2 ) compressed air to opening in case. See Fig. 12 . See OD
BRAKE PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS table. If piston stroke is not within specifications,
inspect clutch discs.

OD BRAKE PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS


Model &
Transmission Piston Stroke - In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 & .069-.081 (1.75-2.05)
LX 470 A-
343F
Toyota
Land .069-.081 (1.75-2.05)
Cruiser A-
343F
Tacoma & 4Runner
A-340E .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
A-340F .052-.064 (1.32-1.62)
T100
2WD .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
A-340E
4WD .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
A-340F

8. Remove snap ring. Remove OD brake clutch pack flanges, plates and discs. Note number and location of
all components. Place reference mark on 2nd coast brake piston rod. Apply 57-114 psi (4.8 kg/cm2 ) of
air at opening of transmission case. Using wire gauge, measure clearance between reference mark and
case. See Fig. 13 and Fig. 14 . See 2ND COAST BRAKE PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS
table. If stroke is not within specification, inspect brake band.

2ND COAST BRAKE PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS


Model &
Transmission Piston Stroke - In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 & .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
LX 470 A-
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 36 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

343F
Toyota
Land .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
Cruiser A-
343F
Tacoma & .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
4Runner
A-340E &
A-340F
T100 A- .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
340E & A-
340F

9. Remove 2nd coast brake cover snap ring. Carefully apply air pressure to oil hole as in step 13) to remove
cover, piston and spring. Remove thrust bearing and race from overdrive support assembly. Remove
overdrive support-to-case bolts. Remove snap ring. Using appropriate puller, remove overdrive support
assembly. Remove race from rear of support assembly. Remove direct clutch with forward clutch from
case. Remove bearings and race from clutch assembly.
10. Remove "E" ring from 2nd coast brake band pin and remove pin. Remove 2nd coast brake band. Remove
race from front planetary ring gear. Remove front planetary ring gear. Remove thrust bearing and race
from inside ring gear. Remove race from front planetary gear. Place transmission on end and support
output shaft on wooden blocks. Remove snap ring located above front planetary gear. Remove front
planetary gear. See Fig. 11 .
11. Remove sun gear drum and one-way clutch. Check clutch pack clearance of second brake. See Fig. 16 .
See 2ND BRAKE CLUTCH PACK CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS table. If clearance is not
within specifications, inspect condition of clutch discs. Remove flange snap ring.
12. Remove the flange, plates and discs. Note the number and location of all components. Check clutch pack
clearance of 1st and reverse brakes. See Fig. 15 . See 1ST & REVERSE BRAKE PACK
CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS table. If clearance is not within specifications, inspect condition of
clutch discs.

2ND BRAKE CLUTCH PACK CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS


Model &
Transmission Piston Stroke - In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 & .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
LX 470 A-
343F
Toyota
Land .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
Cruiser A-
343F
Tacoma & 4Runner
A-340E .024-.078 (.61-1.98)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 37 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

A-340F .020-.069 (.50-1.76)


T100
2WD .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
A-340E
4WD .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
A-340F

1ST & REVERSE BRAKE PACK CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS


Model &
Transmission Clearance - In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 & .028-.048 (.71-1.22)
LX 470 A-
343F
Toyota
Land .028-.048 (.71-1.22)
Cruiser A-
343F
Tacoma & 4Runner
A-340E .024-.044 (.61-1.12)
A-340F .020-.040 (.50-1.02)
T100
2WD .024-.044 (.61-1.12)
A-340E
4WD .024-.044 (.61-1.12)
A-340F

13. Remove 2nd brake piston sleeve. Remove rear planetary gear unit snap ring. Remove rear planetary gear,
2nd brake drum, 1st and reverse brake pack and output shaft as an assembly. Remove thrust bearing and
race from case. Remove 2nd brake drum assembly. See Fig. 11 .
14. Remove 1st and reverse brake cushion plate, flange, plates and discs. Note number and location of all
components. Remove leaf spring from case. Remove brake drum gasket from case.
15. Ensure 1st and reverse brake pistons move smoothly when applying compressed air into case. See Fig.
17 . Disassemble 1st and reverse brake piston. Install appropriate compressor on spring retainer and
compress return spring. See Fig. 18 . Remove snap ring. Remove piston return spring. Using compressed
air, remove 1st and reverse brake piston No. 2. See Fig. 17 .
16. Insert Sleeve Remover (09350-07080) behind reaction sleeve. Remove reaction sleeve from case. See
Fig. 19 and Fig. 20 . Insert Piston Remover (09350-07090) behind No. 1 brake piston. Remove No. 1
brake piston from case. On A-340E model, remove manual valve lever spacer from shaft. Remove pin.
Pull shaft out through case and remove lever. Remove 2 oil seals.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 38 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 8: Removing 2nd Brake & Direct Clutch Accumulator Pistons & Springs
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 39 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 9: Removing Overdrive Brake Accumulator Pistons & Springs


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 40 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 10: Removing Overdrive Direct Clutch Accumulator Pistons & Springs
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 11: Exploded View Of A-340E, A-340F & A-343F Internal Components
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 41 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 12: Measuring Overdrive Brake Piston Stroke


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:25 AM Page 42 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 13: Identifying 2nd Coast Brake Piston Rod Reference Mark Location
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 43 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 14: Checking 2nd Coast Brake Piston Stroke Clearance


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 44 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 15: Checking 1st & Reverse Brake Clearance


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 45 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 16: Checking 2nd Brake Clearance


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 46 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 17: Checking 1st & Reverse Brake Piston Travel


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 47 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 18: Compressing 1st & Reverse Brake Return Spring


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 48 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 19: Removing Brake Piston


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 49 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 20: Removing Reaction Sleeve


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY & REASSEMBLY


OIL PUMP

Disassembly

1. Place oil pump on torque converter while working on pump. Remove seal rings from rear of oil pump.
Remove bolts from rear of pump assembly. Remove stator shaft from pump housing. See Fig. 21 .
2. Place reference mark on drive and driven gears for reassembly reference and remove from pump housing.
If oil seal requires replacement, pry seal from housing with a screwdriver.

Cleaning & Inspection

1. Clean all components in solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect contact surfaces between housing and
driven gear for wear. Check gears for wear and body crescent for damage. Check pump gear contact
surface on stator shaft for damage and wear.
2. Measure inside diameter of oil pump housing and stator shaft bushings. Measure driven gear-to-housing
clearance and gear tip clearance. Using feeler gauge and straightedge, measure gear side clearance
between pump housing face and top of gears. See Fig. 22 . See OIL PUMP CLEARANCE
SPECIFICATIONS table.
3. If clearance(s) are not within specifications, replace worn component(s). Pump gears must be replaced as

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 50 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

a matched set. If bushing diameter exceeds specification, oil pump housing or stator shaft must be
replaced.

OIL PUMP CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Gear-To-Housing
Standard .003-.006 (.07-.15)
Maximum .012 (.30)
Gear Tip Clearance
Standard .004-.006 (.11-.14)
Maximum .012 (.30)
Gear Side Clearance
Standard .0008-.0020 (.020-.050)
Maximum .004 (.10)
Housing Bushing 1.504 (38.19)
Stator Shaft Bushing (Maximum)
Front .850 (21.58)
Rear 1.066 (27.08)

Reassembly

1. Install oil seal until seal is even with outer edge of pump housing. Place stator shaft in torque converter
while working on pump. Coat all components with ATF. See Fig. 21 .
2. Align reference marks on gears during installation. To complete reassembly, reverse disassembly
procedure. Tighten bolts to specification. DO NOT over expand seal rings during installation. Ensure seal
rings move smoothly after installation. Ensure drive gear rotates smoothly when installed in torque
converter.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 51 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 21: Exploded View Of Oil Pump Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 52 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 22: Measuring Oil Pump Clearances


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OD PLANETARY GEAR, OD DIRECT CLUTCH & OD ONE-WAY CLUTCH

Disassembly

1. One-way clutch operation should be checked prior to disassembly. Hold clutch drum and rotate input
shaft clockwise. See Fig. 23 . Input shaft should rotate freely clockwise and lock counterclockwise.
2. Remove clutch drum from planetary gear. Remove thrust bearing from clutch drum. Remove snap ring,
flange, discs and plates from clutch drum. Note number and location of components.
3. Using appropriate compressor, compress piston return spring and remove snap ring. Carefully release
press and remove piston return spring. Place oil pump on torque converter. Place clutch drum on pump.
Hold clutch piston and carefully apply air pressure to oil pump port. See Fig. 24 . Remove direct clutch
piston.
4. Remove snap ring and ring gear flange from planetary ring gear. Remove bearing race from rear of
planetary gear. Remove snap ring, retaining plate, one-way clutch assembly and thrust washer from
planetary gear. Remove one-way clutch from outer race. Remove thrust washer.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 53 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Inspection

1. Clean all components (except discs) with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect plates and discs for
flaking or burnt areas. Ensure check ball does not allow air to bleed through piston.
2. Measure inside diameter of clutch drum bushing and planetary gear bushing. Maximum diameter for
overdrive direct clutch drum bushing is 1.067" (27.11 mm). Maximum diameter for overdrive planetary
gear bushing is .444" (11.27 mm). Replace components if damaged or not within specifications.
3. Measure planetary pinion gear thrust clearance. Standard clearance should be .008-.024" (.20-.61 mm).
Maximum clearance is .039" (1.00 mm). If clearance is not within specifications, replace planetary gear
assembly. Check OD direct clutch return spring free length. Include spring seat in measurement. Standard
free length is .622" (15.80 mm).

Fig. 23: Checking OD One-Way Clutch Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CAUTION: Clutch discs should be soaked in ATF for 15 minutes prior to installation.
Coat all parts with ATF prior to installation. Coat thrust bearings and races
with petroleum jelly prior to installation.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 54 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Reassembly

1. Position planetary gear with input shaft pointing upward. Install thrust washer in planetary gear with
grooved side facing upward. Install one-way clutch into outer race with flanged side facing upward. See
Fig. 25 .
2. Install one-way clutch assembly on planetary gear. Install retaining plate and snap ring. Install race on
back of planetary gear. Race tabs must be engaged in planetary gear. See Fig. 26 .
3. Install ring gear flange and snap ring. Install thrust bearing and race in planetary ring gear. Race tabs must
be engaged in ring gear. Coat "O" rings with ATF and install on clutch piston. Carefully install clutch
piston in clutch drum. Install piston return spring. Using appropriate compressor, compress return spring
and install snap ring. Ensure ring is fully seated.

CAUTION: Ensure ends of snap ring do not align with claw area on spring
retainer of piston return spring.

4. With clutch drum open area facing upward, install plates and discs, starting with plate. Install flange with
flat end facing toward disc. Install snap ring. Place oil pump on torque converter. Place clutch drum on oil
pump. Measure piston stroke while applying 57-114 psi (4-8 kg/cm2 ) to oil pump port. See Fig. 24 . See
OVERDRIVE DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS table. If piston stroke is
not within specifications, check for incorrectly assembled components. Recheck piston stroke.

OVERDRIVE DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
& LX
470
Toyota
A-340E .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
A-340F .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
(T100)
A-340F .070-.082 (1.77-2.07)
(Except
T100)
A-343F .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)

5. If piston stroke exceeds specification, install different thickness flange. Flanges are available in
thicknesses of .122" (3.09 mm) to .142" (3.60 mm) in .004" (.10 mm) increments.
6. Remove clutch assembly from oil pump. Install thrust bearing and race in clutch drum with race toward
clutch drum. Align tabs of clutch discs. See Fig. 26 . Install direct clutch drum on planetary gear. Hold
clutch drum and rotate input shaft clockwise. Input shaft should rotate freely clockwise and lock
counterclockwise.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 55 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 24: Removing Clutch Piston & Measuring Stroke


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 56 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 25: Installing Overdrive One-Way Clutch


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 57 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 26: Exploded View Of Overdrive Clutch Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OVERDRIVE BRAKE

Disassembly

Remove all thrust washers from overdrive support. Using appropriate compressor, compress piston return
spring and remove snap ring. Place support on direct clutch assembly. Hold brake piston in a level position.
Carefully apply air pressure to piston supply port and remove piston. Remove oil seal rings from rear of
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 58 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

support. See Fig. 27 .

Inspection

Clean all components with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect components for damage. Measure return
spring free length. Free length should be .678" (17.23 mm). Replace components as necessary.

Reassembly

1. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. Coat seal rings with ATF prior to installation. DO NOT
over expand seal rings during piston installation. Ensure seal rings move smoothly after installation.
2. Install NEW "O" rings on OD brake piston. Use care not to damage "O" rings during piston installation.
Install snap ring in support and ensure end of snap ring is not aligned with cutout portion of support.
3. Ensure tabs on all races are aligned with areas on support. Coat races and thrust bearings with petroleum
jelly prior to installation. Place support on direct clutch assembly and apply air pressure to piston supply
port. Ensure piston operates smoothly in support. See Fig. 27 .

Fig. 27: Exploded View Of Overdrive Support & Brake


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DIRECT CLUTCH

Disassembly

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 59 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

1. Remove direct clutch drum from forward clutch assembly. Remove thrust washer from inside of clutch
drum. Remove snap ring from clutch drum. Remove flange, discs and plates. Note number and location of
components. See Fig. 28 .
2. Using appropriate compressor, compress piston return spring and remove snap ring or oil seal ring. Place
clutch drum on overdrive support and carefully apply air pressure to piston supply port and remove clutch
piston. See Fig. 29 .

Inspection

1. Clean all components (except discs) with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect plates and discs for
flaking or burnt areas.
2. Ensure check ball is free in clutch piston. Apply air pressure to check ball area. Ensure check ball does
not allow air to bleed through piston. Measure free length of piston return spring. Length should
be .839" (21.32 mm).
3. Measure inside diameter of clutch drum bushing. Replace the clutch drum if bushing diameter exceeds
specification. See DIRECT CLUTCH DRUM BUSHING SPECIFICATIONS table.

DIRECT CLUTCH DRUM BUSHING SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Lexus LX 450 & LX 470 2.126 (53.99)
Toyota (All Models) 2.126 (53.99)

CAUTION: Clutch discs should be soaked in ATF for 15 minutes prior to installation.
Thrust washers and races should be coated with petroleum jelly prior to
installation.

Reassembly

1. Coat "O" rings with ATF. To complete reassembly, reverse disassembly procedure. Ensure piston return
spring snap ring or oil seal ring is fully seated and ring ends do not align with claw area on spring retainer
of piston return spring.
2. With clutch drum open area facing upward, install plates and discs, starting with a plate and then
alternating with a disc. Install appropriate number of plates and discs.
3. Install flange with flat end facing toward disc. Install snap ring. Place clutch drum on overdrive support.
Measure piston stroke with a dial indicator while applying 57-114 psi (4-8 kg/cm2 ) to piston supply port.
See Fig. 29 .
4. See DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS table. If piston stroke is not within
specifications, check for incorrectly assembled components. Recheck piston stroke measurement.

DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Lexus LX .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
450 & LX
470
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 60 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Toyota
A-340E .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
A-340F .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
(T100)
A-340F .041-.052 (1.03-1.33)
(Except
T100)
A-343F .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)

5. If piston stroke is not within specifications, install different thickness flange. Flanges for Toyota A-340E,
A-340F and A-343F are available in thicknesses of .118" (2.99 mm) to .146" (3.70 mm) in .004" (.10
mm) increments. Flanges for Lexus A-340E are available in thicknesses of .126 (3.20 mm) to .157" (4.00
mm) in .004" (.10 mm) increments.
6. Install thrust washer in clutch drum. Align tabs of clutch discs. Install direct clutch assembly on forward
clutch assembly. Measure distance from end of direct clutch to shaft end of forward clutch. Distance
should be 2.803" (71.2 mm). See Fig. 30 . If distance is not within specifications, components may be
incorrectly assembled.

Fig. 28: Exploded View Of Direct Clutch Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 61 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 29: Measuring Piston Stroke


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 62 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 30: Checking Direct Clutch Installation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FORWARD CLUTCH

Disassembly

1. Separate forward clutch assembly from direct clutch. Place overdrive support on wooden blocks and
install forward clutch in overdrive support. Remove snap ring from clutch drum. Remove flange, discs,
plates and cushion plate. See Fig. 31 . Note number and location of components.
2. Using appropriate compressor, compress piston return spring and remove snap ring. Place clutch drum on
overdrive support. Carefully apply air pressure to piston supply port and remove clutch piston. Remove
"O" rings from clutch piston and clutch hub. Remove oil seal rings.

Inspection

Clean all components (except discs) with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect plates and discs for flaking
or burnt areas. Ensure check ball is free in clutch piston. Apply air pressure to check ball area. Ensure check
ball does not allow air to bleed through piston. Measure inside diameter of clutch drum bushing. Replace clutch

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 63 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

drum if bushing diameter exceeds .948" (24.08 mm).

CAUTION: Clutch disc should be soaked in ATF for 15 minutes prior to installation.

Reassembly

1. Coat "O" rings with ATF. To complete reassembly, reverse disassembly procedure. Ensure piston return
spring snap ring is fully seated and ends do not align with claw area on spring retainer of piston return
spring.
2. Install cushion plate with rounded end toward inside of clutch drum. Install plates and discs, starting with
a plate. Install appropriate number of plates and discs. See Fig. 31 .
3. Install flange with rounded edge toward disc. Install snap ring. Ensure end gap of snap ring is not aligned
with forward clutch drum cut out portion. Place clutch drum on overdrive support. Measure piston stroke
while applying 57-114 psi (4-8 kg/cm2 ) to piston supply port. See Fig. 32 . See FORWARD CLUTCH
PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS table.
4. If clearance is not within specifications, install different thickness flange. Flanges are available in
thicknesses of .118" (3.0 mm) to .173" (4.4 mm) in .008" (.20 mm) increments. Install thrust bearing and
race. Align tabs of the clutch discs.

FORWARD CLUTCH PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS


Application In. (mm)
Lexus LX 450 & LX 470 .024-.039 (.61-.100)
Toyota
A-340E .020-.035 (.50-.90)
A-340F (T100) .020-.035 (.50-.90)
A-340F (Except T100) .016-.031 (.40-.80)
A-343F .024-.039 (.61-.100)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 64 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 31: Exploded View Of Forward Clutch


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 65 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 32: Checking Forward Clutch Piston Stroke


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FRONT PLANETARY GEAR

Disassembly & Inspection

Remove thrust bearings and races from planetary gear and front planetary ring gear. Note direction of race
installation. Measure front planetary ring gear bushing inside diameter. Replace planetary ring gear if bushing
diameter exceeds .948" (24.08 mm). Measure planetary pinion gear thrust clearance. Clearance should be .008-
.024" (.20-.61 mm). Maximum clearance is .039" (1.00 mm). If clearance is not within specifications, replace
planetary gear assembly.

Reassembly

Coat thrust bearings and races with petroleum jelly. Install thrust bearings and races, ensuring tabs on race align
with planetary gear. Install races in planetary ring gear and planetary gear with the flat side against the gear
surface. See Fig. 33 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 66 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 33: Exploded View Of Front Planetary Gear


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

PLANETARY SUN GEAR & NO. 1 ONE-WAY CLUTCH

Disassembly

Hold sun gear input drum and check rotation of one-way clutch. Clutch should turn freely clockwise and lock
counterclockwise. See Fig. 35 . Remove one-way clutch assembly. Note direction of clutch installation.
Remove thrust washer and oil seal rings from sun gear input drum and sun gear. Support sun gear input drum on
wooden block and remove snap ring from sun gear. Separate sun gear from sun gear input drum. See Fig. 36 .

Inspection

Clean components in solvent. Dry with compressed air. Measure inside diameter of sun gear bushing. Replace
sun gear if diameter exceeds 1.066" (27.08 mm).

Reassembly

To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. See Fig. 36 . Ensure ends of oil seal rings are properly locked
together and seal rings move smoothly. Install one-way clutch assembly in proper direction. Check one-way
clutch operation. See Fig. 34 and Fig. 35 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 67 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 34: Installing No. 1 One-Way Clutch


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 68 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 35: Checking No. 1 One-Way Clutch Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 69 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 36: Exploded View Of Planetary Sun Gear & No. 1 One-Way Clutch
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2ND COAST BRAKE (BAND)

Disassembly

Compress spring and remove "E" ring from piston rod. Remove 2nd coast brake piston, spring and retainer from
piston rod. Remove oil seal ring.

Inspection

1. Replace brake band if lining is peeled off or discolored or printed numbers are defaced. Before
assembling NEW band, soak band in ATF for at least 15 minutes.
2. If brake band is serviceable but piston rod stroke is not within specification, select replacement rod. Rods
are available in lengths of 2.78" (70.7 mm), 2.81" (71.4 mm), 2.84" (72.2 mm), 2.87" (72.9 mm) and
2.09" (73.1 mm).

Reassembly

Install oil seal ring on piston. Install retainer, spring and piston to piston rod. Install "E" ring. See Fig. 37 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 70 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 37: Exploded View Of 2nd Coast Brake


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2ND BRAKE

Disassembly

Remove thrust washer. Using appropriate compressor, compress piston return spring with an arbor press.
Remove snap ring. Remove spring retainer and piston return spring. Hold 2nd brake piston and apply
compressed air to 2nd brake drum to remove piston.

Inspection

Check all parts for wear and damage. Soak NEW discs in ATF for 15 minutes before installation. Measure
return spring free length. Free length should be .773" (19.64 mm). Replace components as necessary.

Reassembly

Coat NEW "O" rings with ATF and install. Carefully press 2nd brake piston into 2nd brake drum. Install piston
return spring and spring retainer. See Fig. 38 . Compress return spring and install snap ring. Apply compressed
air to 2nd brake drum. Ensure 2nd brake piston moves smoothly. Install thrust washer. Ensure cutout portions of
thrust washer match teeth of spring retainer.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 71 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 38: Exploded View Of 2nd Brake Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REAR PLANETARY GEAR, NO. 2 ONE-WAY CLUTCH & OUTPUT SHAFT

Disassembly

1. Remove output shaft from rear planetary gear assembly. Remove oil seal from output shaft. Remove rear
planetary gear from rear planetary ring gear. Hold planetary gear and check operation of No. 2 one-way
clutch. Clutch should turn freely counterclockwise and lock clockwise. See Fig. 39 and Fig. 40 . Remove
No. 2 one-way clutch inner race from rear planetary gear.
2. Remove snap ring and No. 2 one-way clutch with retainers from planetary gear. Note direction of one-
way clutch in planetary gear. Remove No. 1 and 2 thrust washers from planetary gear. Remove bearings
and races from ring gear. Remove snap ring and ring gear flange from ring gear. See Fig. 41 .

Inspection

Clean all components with solvent. Dry with compressed air. Inspect all components for damage. Replace if
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 72 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

necessary. Measure planetary pinion gear thrust clearance. Standard clearance should be .008-.024" (.20-.61
mm). Maximum clearance is .039" (1.00 mm). If clearance is not within specifications, replace planetary gear
assembly.

Reassembly

1. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. Coat all thrust bearings and races with petroleum jelly.
When installing thrust bearings and races in ring gear, flat side of race must be placed against ring gear.
2. Ensure No. 1 and 2 thrust washer tangs align with cutout area of planetary gear. Install No. 2 one-way
clutch with open ends facing upward. See Fig. 39 and Fig. 40 .
3. Rotate one-way clutch inner race counterclockwise during installation into rear planetary gear. Ensure
No. 2 one-way clutch turns freely counterclockwise and locks clockwise. See Fig. 39 and Fig. 40 .
4. Install rear planetary gear on rear planetary ring gear. Install oil seal ring. DO NOT spread oil seal ring
too much. After installing oil seal ring, ensure seal ring rotates smoothly. Install output shaft into rear
planetary gear assembly. See Fig. 41 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 73 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 39: Installing No. 2 One-Way Clutch


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 74 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 40: Checking No. 2 One-Way Clutch Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 75 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 41: Exploded View Of Output Shaft Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

CAUTION: All valve body components must be installed in original location. Lay all
components in sequence during removal for reassembly reference. Note
diameter and check ball location. Throttle pressure is changed according
to number of adjusting rings. When assembling valve body, install same
number of adjusting rings as removed. Some valve bodies do not have
adjusting rings.

Disassembly

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 76 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Remove detent spring and manual valve from valve body assembly. Remove solenoids and lock plate (if
applicable), oil strainer and pressure relief valve. Remove lower valve body-to upper valve body bolts. Note
bolt length and location. Separate upper valve body and valve body plate from lower valve body. See Fig. 42 .

Fig. 42: Exploded View Of A-340 Series Control Valve Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A. INC.

CAUTION: DO NOT allow valve body plate to separate from upper valve body during
removal, or check balls and strainer may fall out.

Inspection

1. Clean all parts in solvent. Dry with compressed air. Ensure all valve body passages are clear. Ensure
strainers are not damaged or clogged. Inspect valves for scoring or roughness.
2. Ensure valves slide freely in bores. Inspect valve springs for damage, squareness and collapsed coils.
Measure spring free length. Replace spring if not within specification. See appropriate VALVE BODY
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS table. Ensure valve body springs correspond with appropriate valve.
Ensure retainers are installed in appropriate locations.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 77 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

VALVE BODY SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

A-340E UPPER VALVE BODY SPRING SPECIFICATIONS


Spring (1) Free Length - In. (mm) Diameter - In. (mm) Color
1 1.075 (27.30) .343 (8.70) Yellow
2 .811 (20.60) .362 (9.20) Blue
2 (Optional) .917 (23.30) .362 (9.20) White
3 1.213 (30.80) .382 (9.70) Purple
4 .996 (25.30) .339 (8.60) Orange
5 .843 (21.40) .217 (5.50) Light Gray
6 1.217 (30.90) .441 (11.20) Blue
7 .858 (21.80) .236 (6.00) Red
8 1.213 (30.80) .382 (9.70) Blue
9 1.197 (30.40) .327 (8.30) Yellow
(1) For spring locations, see Fig. 43 .

A-343F UPPER VALVE BODY SPRING SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER, LX 450 & LX 470)
Spring (1) Free Length - In. (mm) Diameter - In. (mm) Color
1 1.075 (27.30) .343 (8.70) Yellow
2 .811 (20.60) .362 (9.20) Blue
2 (Optional) .917 (23.30) .362 (9.20) White
3 1.213 (30.80) .382 (9.70) Purple
4 1.217 (30.90) .327 (8.30) Purple
5 .843 (21.40) .217 (5.50) Light Gray
6 1.177 (29.90) .433 (11.00) Green
7 .858 (21.80) .236 (6.00) Red
8 1.213 (30.80) .382 (9.70) Blue
9 1.197 (30.40) .327 (8.30) Light Green
(1) For spring locations, see Fig. 43 .

A-340 SERIES LOWER VALVE BODY SPRING SPECIFICATIONS


Spring (1) Free Length - In. (mm) Diameter - In. (mm) Color
1 .796 (20.20) .476 (12.10) None
2 .441 (11.20) .252 (6.40) None
3 1.213 (30.80) .382 (9.70) Purple
4 2.453 (62.30) .732 (18.60) Purple
5 1.335 (33.90) .346 (8.80) Pink
(1) For spring locations, see Fig. 44 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 78 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 43: Exploded View Of A-340 Series Upper Valve Body


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 79 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 44: Exploded View Of A-340 Series Lower Valve Body


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

NOTE: Valves may be held in with pins or retainers and plugs. Remove components
and note locations. Arrange parts in order for reassembly reference.

Reassembly

1. Coat all components with ATF. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. Ensure check balls in
upper and lower valve body are installed correctly. See Fig. 47 .
2. Position NEW No. 1 gasket, plate and NEW No. 2 gasket on upper valve body. Place lower valve body
on upper valve body with plate and gaskets. DO NOT let components separate. Align each bolt hole in
valve bodies with gaskets and plate.
3. Install and finger tighten bolts in upper valve body. Ensure proper bolt length is used. See Fig. 48 .
Tighten bolts to 56 INCH lbs. (6.4 N.m). Install oil strainer, pressure relief valve and solenoids (as
applicable). Install manual valve and detent spring. Tighten bolts to 89 INCH lbs. (10 N.m). Ensure
manual valve moves freely.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 80 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 45: Identifying Upper Valve Body Check Ball Locations (Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner A-340E, Land
Cruiser, LX 450 & LX 470 A-343F)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 81 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 46: Identifying Upper Valve Body Check Ball Locations (Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner A-340F)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 82 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 47: Identifying Lower Valve Body Check Ball Locations (A-340 Series)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 83 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 48: Identifying A-340 Series Valve Body Bolts


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY

NOTE: Coat all oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding
surfaces with ATF prior to reassembly. All gaskets and rubber "O" rings should
be replaced. Ensure ends of snap rings are not aligned with cutouts and are
installed correctly in groove. If a worn bushing is to be replaced, replacement
must be made with subassembly containing that bushing. Check thrust
bearings and races for wear or damage. Use petroleum jelly to hold parts in
place. Replace parts as necessary. Clutch discs should be soaked in ATF for 15
minutes before installation.

1. Before transmission reassembly, inspect case bushing and extension housing bushing (if equipped).
Maximum transmission case bushing inside diameter is 1.504" (38.19 mm). Maximum extension housing
bushing inside diameter is 1.578" (40.09 mm). If bushings are not within specifications, manufacturer
recommends replacing transmission case and/or extension housing.

NOTE: For thrust bearing and race identification and installation positions, see
Fig. 52 and Fig. 53 .

2. Install 1st and reverse brake No. 1 piston to reaction sleeve. Install No. 1 piston with reaction sleeve on
No. 2 piston. Align No. 2 piston teeth into proper grooves. Carefully press No. 1 and No. 2 brake pistons
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 84 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

into case. Position piston return spring on No. 2 piston. Using Spring Compressor (09350-07050),
compress return spring. See Fig. 18 .
3. Install snap ring. Ensure snap ring end-gap is not aligned with spring retainer claw. Ensure 1st and
reverse brake pistons move smoothly by applying compressed air to case. See Fig. 17 .
4. Install leaf spring (if equipped). Install rear planetary gear unit with 1st and reverse brake pack and output
shaft. Install flange with rounded edge toward planetary ring gear. Install flange. Install plates and discs,
starting with disc. Install correct number of plates and discs.
5. Install 2nd brake drum assembly. Install thrust bearing in case. Align teeth of 2nd brake drum, flange,
discs and plates. Align splines of transmission case, assembled rear planetary gear, 2nd brake drum, 1st
and reverse brake pack and output shaft into case.
6. Support output shaft on wooden blocks. Install snap ring in case with chamfered edge toward front of
transmission. Ensure ends of snap ring are not aligned with cutout area of case. Measure 1st and reverse
brake clearance between 2nd brake drum and plate. See Fig. 15 . See 1ST & REVERSE BRAKE PACK
CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS table.
7. If clearance is not within specification, select a different thickness flange. Flanges are available in
thicknesses of .157" (4.0 mm) to .213" (5.4 mm) in .008" (.20 mm) increments.
8. Install 2nd brake piston sleeve. Install NEW brake drum gasket in case. Install No. 1 one-way clutch. On
all models except A-340F, install .071" (1.8 mm) flange plate with rounded edge side of plate facing disc.
Install plates and discs starting with disc. Install end flange with rounded edge facing disc. Install snap
ring.
9. On A-340F, install .098" (2.5 mm) flange plate with rounded edge side of plate facing disc. Install plates
and discs. Install end flange with rounded edge facing disc. Install snap ring.
10. On all models, measure 2nd brake clearance between snap ring and flange. See Fig. 16 . See 2ND
BRAKE CLUTCH PACK CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS table. If clearance is not within
specifications, check for incorrect assembly.
11. Install planetary sun gear. Turn planetary sun gear clockwise into No. 1 one-way clutch. Ensure all thrust
washers are correctly installed. Install front planetary gear bearing and race. Install front planetary gear
into sun gear. Install snap ring. Remove wooden block from under output shaft. Install race on front of
planetary gear so race tabs align with planetary gear holes.
12. Install 2nd coast brake band and pin. Pin must be installed so "E" ring is toward front of transmission.
Install "E" ring. Coat thrust bearing and race with petroleum jelly and install on forward clutch. Raised
portion of race must be toward front.

NOTE: For thrust bearing and race identification and installation positions, see
Fig. 52 and Fig. 53 .

13. Install race on front planetary ring gear. Smooth flat surface must be toward front. Align disc tabs of
forward clutch. Install front planetary gear in forward clutch. Ensure gear is aligned with all clutch discs.
14. Install bearing race and thrust bearing on ring gear. Raised portion of race must be toward rear. Install
forward and direct clutch assembly and front planetary ring gear in transmission case. Measure distance
between sun gear input drum and direct clutch drum. Clearance should be .209-.287" (5.30-7.30 mm). See
Fig. 49 . If clearance is not within specifications, check for incorrect installation.
15. Install thrust bearing and race on forward clutch assembly with flat side toward clutch assembly. Install
NEW "O" ring on 2nd coast brake cover. Install spring, 2nd coast brake piston assembly and cover to
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 85 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

case. Install snap ring.


16. Place reference mark on 2nd coast brake piston rod. Apply 57-114 psi (4.8 kg/cm2 ) of air at opening of
transmission case. Using wire gauge, measure clearance between reference mark and case. See Fig. 13
and Fig. 14 . See 2ND COAST BRAKE PISTON STROKE SPECIFICATIONS table.
17. If stroke is not within specification, install replacement piston rod. Rods are available in lengths of
2.78" (70.7 mm), 2.81" (71.4 mm), 2.84" (72.2 mm) and 2.87" (72.9 mm). If stroke is not within
specification, install NEW brake band. Install race on overdrive support. Install bolt and oil holes of
overdrive support toward valve body side and align with bolt holes of case. Install support.
18. Ensure support is properly aligned. Install support snap ring with chamfered edge toward front of
transmission. End of snap ring must be positioned to valve body side of case within .94" (23.9 mm) from
center line of valve body as viewed from front of transmission.
19. Using dial indicator, check output shaft end play. End play should be .011-.034" (.27-.86 mm). If end play
is not within specifications, check for incorrect assembly. Ensure output shaft rotates smoothly.
20. Install a .157" (4.00 mm) thick flange with rounded edge facing disc. Install correct number of discs and
plates, beginning with plate. Install end flange (stepped ring) with flat side toward disc. Install snap ring.
Ensure ends of snap ring are not located at cutout areas of case.
21. Install dial indicator on case and measure piston stroke. Apply 57-114 psi (4-8 kg/cm2 ) at opening of
transmission case and note piston stroke. See Fig. 12 . See OD BRAKE PISTON STROKE
SPECIFICATIONS table.
22. If piston stroke is not within specifications, check for incorrect installation. Recheck piston stroke. If
piston stroke is not within specifications, install different thickness flange. Flanges are available in
thicknesses of .130" (3.3 mm) to .157" (4.0 mm) in .008" (.20 mm) increments.
23. Install thrust bearing and races on overdrive support. Ensure race tabs align with hole support. Install
overdrive planetary ring gear. Install thrust bearing and race in ring gear. Install race on rear of overdrive
planetary gear, aligning race tabs with holes of gear.
24. Install overdrive planetary gear with overdrive direct clutch and one-way clutch. Install thrust bearing and
race onto OD direct clutch with race flat side toward direct clutch.
25. Install race on rear of oil pump with raised side toward oil pump. Install NEW "O" ring on outer diameter
of oil pump. Ensure oil seal rings are installed on rear of oil pump. Align holes of oil pump and
transmission case. Install oil pump while holding input shaft and lightly pressing on oil pump.

CAUTION: DO NOT apply excessive pressure on oil pump during installation, or


oil seal rings will stick to direct clutch drum.

26. Install oil pump bolts and tighten to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Ensure input
shaft rotates smoothly. Install throttle cable. Apply air pressure to specified oil passage to check operating
components. See Fig. 50 . When air checking OD direct clutch, overdrive accumulator piston hole must
be plugged.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 86 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 49: Measuring Input Drum & Direct Clutch Drum Clearance
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 87 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 50: Air Testing Transmission Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

27. Assemble NEW spacer-to-manual valve lever. Install manual lever shaft to case through manual valve
lever. Install pin to shaft. Align spacer hole with lever hole and stake spacer to lever. Ensure manual
valve lever shaft turns smoothly.
28. Install "E" ring, parking lock pawl, shaft and spring. Connect parking lock rod to manual valve lever.
Position parking lock pawl, shaft and spring. Connect parking lock rod to manual valve lever. Position
parking lock pawl bracket on case and install.
29. Install accumulator pistons with NEW "O" rings and springs. See Fig. 51 . Accumulator pistons and
springs must be correct diameter and height. Accumulator pistons are stamped with identification codes.
Determine correct spring free length. See appropriate ACCUMULATOR SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
table.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 88 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 51: Identifying Accumulator Piston Assemblies


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

ACCUMULATOR SPRING SPECIFICATIONS (A-340E)


Component,
Code & Free Length - In. Diameter - In.
Color (mm) (mm)
2nd Brake 2.776 (70.50) .776 (19.70)
(B2) -
Yellow
Direct Clutch (C2)
Inner - 1.657 (42.10) .579 (14.70)
Pink
Outer - 2.764 (70.20) .795 (20.20)
Purple
OD Brake 2.441 (62.00) .630 (16.00)
(B0) - Green
OD Direct Clutch (C0)
Inner - 1.811 (46.00) .551 (14.00)
Yellow
Outer - 2.937 (74.60) .823 (20.90)
Orange

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 89 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

ACCUMULATOR SPRING SPECIFICATIONS (A-340F)


Free Length - Diameter - In.
Component, Code & Color In. (mm) (mm)
2nd Brake (B2) - Yellow 2.776 (70.50) .776 (19.70)
Direct Clutch (C2) - Blue 2.697 (68.50) .795 (20.20)
OD Brake (B0) - Lt. Green 2.744 (69.70) .657 (16.70)
OD Direct Clutch (C0) - 2.638 (67.00) .701 (17.80)
White

ACCUMULATOR SPRING SPECIFICATIONS (1) (A-343F)


Spring (Color) Free Length - In. (mm)
2nd Brake 2.858 (72.60)
(Light Gray)
Direct Clutch
Inner (Pink) 1.657 (42.10)
Outer 2.886 (73.30)
(White/Red)
OD Brake 2.441 (62.00)
(Green)
OD Direct Clutch
Inner 1.811 (46.00)
(Yellow)
Outer 2.937 (74.60)
(Orange)
(1) Spring diameter is not available.

30. Install check ball body and spring. See Fig. 7 . Install valve body. See TRANSMISSION VALVE
BODY under ON-VEHICLE SERVICE. Install sensor rotor and key on output shaft with snap ring.
Install speedometer drive gear and lock ball and snap ring on output shaft. Install extension housing and
NEW gasket. Shorter mounting bolts go to bottom of extension housing.
31. On A-340F and A-343F models, install transfer case assembly. Install transfer and drive shaft upper dust
cover to transmission. Install engine rear mounting. Install dynamic damper. Install breather hose. Hose
depth is .51" (13 mm).
32. Install transmission housing. On A-340E models, install speed sensor and speedometer driven gear.
Install front and rear cooler line unions. Install No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors (if applicable).
33. Install speed sensor and fluid temperature sensor (if applicable). Install park/neutral position switch.
Tighten nut to 61 INCH lbs. (6.9 N.m). Align neutral basic line and switch groove. Bend at least 2 lock
washer tabs.
34. Install control shaft lever. If throttle cable is new, stake stopper on inner cable. Install wire harness and
throttle cable clamp. Install torque converter. Using straightedge and depth gauge, measure distance from
front of converter to front mounting surface of transmission housing. See TORQUE CONVERTER
DISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS table to determine if converter is fully installed.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 90 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

TORQUE CONVERTER DISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS


Application Distance - In. (mm)
Lexus
LX 450 A-343F .618 (15.70)
LX 470 A-343F .673 (17.10)
Toyota
Land Cruiser A-343F
1997 .618 (15.70)
1998-99 .673 (71.10)
Tacoma & 4Runner
4-Cylinder A-340E & A-340F 1.250 (31.75)
V6 A-340E & A-340F .707 (17.95)
T100
A-340E
4-Cylinder 1.250 (31.75)
V6 .707 (17.95)
A-340F .707 (17.95)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 91 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 52: Identifying Thrust Bearing & Race Installation Positions (Land Cruiser, Lexus LX 450 & LX 470
A-343F)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 92 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Fig. 53: Identifying Thrust Bearing & Race Installation Positions (All Other A-340 Series Models)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

THRUST BEARING & RACE SPECIFICATIONS A-340 SERIES (ALL EXCEPT A-343F)
Outer Diameter - In. Inner Diameter - In.
Application (mm) (mm)
"A"
Front Race 1.86 (47.3) 1.11 (28.1)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 93 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Bearing 1.98 (50.2) 1.14 (28.9)


"B"
Front Race 1.65 (41.8) 1.07 (27.3)
Rear Race 1.88 (47.8) .953 (24.2)
Bearing 1.84 (46.8) 1.02 (26.0)
"C"
Front Race 2.31 (58.8) 1.46 (37.2)
Bearing 2.01 (51.1) 1.33 (33.7)
"D"
Front Race 2.00 (50.9) 1.45 (36.8)
Bearing 1.87 (47.6) 1.33 (33.7)
"E"
Front Race 1.93 (48.9) 1.02 (26.0)
Rear Race 1.85 (47.0) 1.06 (26.8)
Bearing 1.84 (46.7) 1.02 (26.0)
"F"
Front Race 2.11 (53.6) 1.20 (30.6)
Rear Race 1.88 (47.8) 1.35 (34.3)
Bearing 1.88 (47.8) 1.28 (32.6)
"G"
Front Race 1.87 (47.6) 1.33 (33.7)
Bearing 1.88 (47.8) 1.40 (35.5)
"H"
Front Race 1.76 (44.8) 1.13 (28.8)
Rear Race 1.76 (44.8) 1.13 (28.8)
Bearing 1.76 (44.8) 1.19 (30.1)
"I"
Bearing 2.27 (57.7) 1.54 (39.2)

THRUST BEARING & RACE SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER, LX 450 & LX 470 A-343F)
Outer Diameter - In. Inner Diameter - In.
Application (mm) (mm)
"A"
Front Race 1.87 (47.5) 1.11 (28.1)
Bearing 1.98 (50.4) 1.13 (28.8)
"B"
Front Race 1.65 (42.0) 1.07 (27.2)
Rear Race 1.89 (48.0) .94 (24.0)
Bearing 1.85 (47.0) 1.02 (26.0)
"C"
Front Race 2.32 (59.0) 1.46 (37.0)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 94 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Bearing 1.98 (50.4) 1.32 (33.5)


"D"
Front Race 2.01 (51.0) 1.46 (37.0)
Bearing 1.88 (47.8) 1.32 (33.5)
"E"
Rear Race 2.11 (53.7) 1.04 (26.5)
Bearing 1.69 (43.0) 1.02 (26.0)
"F"
Rear Race 2.50 (63.6) 2.10 (53.3)
Bearing 2.55 (64.7) 1.96 (49.7)
"G"
Front Race 1.88 (47.8) 1.32 (33.5)
Bearing 1.89 (48.0) 1.39 (35.4)
"H" (2-piece)
Front Race 1.74 (44.2) 1.12 (28.5)
Bearing 1.74 (44.2) 1.08 (27.5)
"I"
Bearing 2.27 (57.7) 1.54 (39.2)

CLUTCH DISC & PLATE SPECIFICATIONS


CLUTCH DISC & PLATE QUANTITY (TACOMA, T100 & 4RUNNER A-340E)
Component Disc Plate
OD Direct Clutch 2 2
Forward Clutch 5 5
Direct Clutch 4 4
2nd Brake 5 5
1st & Reverse Brake 6 6
OD Brake 4 3

CLUTCH DISC & PLATE QUANTITY (TACOMA, T100 & 4RUNNER A-340F)
Component Disc Plate
OD Direct Clutch 1 1
Forward Clutch 4 4
Direct Clutch 3 3
2nd Brake 4 4
1st & Reverse Brake 5 5
OD Brake 3 2

CLUTCH DISC & PLATE QUANTITY (LAND CRUISER, LX 450 & LX 470 A-343F)
Component Disc Plate
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 95 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

OD Direct Clutch 2 2
Forward Clutch
1997 6 6
1998-99 7 7
Direct Clutch
1997 4 4
1998-99 5 5
2nd Brake 5 5
1st & Reverse Brake 7 7
OD Brake 5 4

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Cooler Union 21 (29)
Dynamic Damper 27 (37)
Extension Housing Bolt 27 (37)
No. 1 Speed Sensor Bolt 12 (16)
Oil Cooler Pipe Union Nut 25 (34)
Oil Pump-To-Case Bolt 16 (22)
Overdrive-To-Case Bolt 18 (25)
Rear Mounting-To-Extension Housing Bolt 18 (25)
Shift Lever Nut 12 (16)
Speedometer Driven Gear Bolt 12 (16)
Support Crossmember-To-Body Bolt 18 (25)
Torque Converter-To-Drive Plate Bolt 30 (41)
Transmission Housing Bolt
10-mm 25 (34)
12-mm 42 (57)
14-mm 25 (34)
17-mm 42 (57)
INCH Lbs. (N.m)
Detent Spring Bolt 89 (10)
Park/Neutral Position Switch
Adjusting Bolt 115 (13)
Retaining Nut 61 (6.9)
No. 2 Speed Sensor Bolt 48 (5.4)
Oil Pan Bolt 65 (7.3)
Oil Pump-To-Stator Shaft Bolt 89 (10)
Oil Strainer Bolt 89 (10)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 96 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Parking Lock Pawl Bracket Bolt 65 (7.3)


Solenoid-To-Valve Body Bolt 89 (10)
Throttle Cable-To-Transmission Case Bolt 48 (5.4)
Upper Valve Body-To-Lower Valve Body Bolt 57 (6.4)
Valve Body-To-Case Bolt 89 (10)

TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER, LX 450 & LX 470)
Application In. (mm)
Bushing Diameter (Maximum)
Direct Clutch Drum 2.126 (53.99)
Extension Housing 1.578 (40.09)
Forward Clutch Drum .948 (24.08)
OD Direct Clutch Drum 1.067 (27.11)
OD Planetary Gear .444 (11.27)
Sun Gear 1.066 (27.08)
Transmission Case 1.504 (38.19)
Clutch Pack Clearance
1st & Reverse Brake .028-.048 (.70-1.22)
2nd Brake Clutch .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
Output Shaft End Play .011-.034 (.27-.86)
Piston Stroke
Direct Clutch .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
Forward Clutch .024-.039 (.61-1.00)
OD Brake .069-.081 (1.75-2.05)
OD Direct Clutch
Land Cruiser .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
LX 450 & LX 470 .057-.067 (1.45-1.70)
2nd Coast Brake .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
Planetary Pinion Gear Clearance .008-.024 (.20-.61)

TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA & 4RUNNER)


Application In. (mm)
Bushing Diameter (Maximum)
Direct Clutch Drum 2.126 (53.99)
Extension Housing 1.578 (40.09)
Forward Clutch Drum .948 (24.08)
OD Direct Clutch Drum 1.067 (27.11)
OD Planetary Gear .444 (11.27)
Planetary Ring Gear .948 (24.08)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 97 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

Sun Gear 1.066 (27.08)


Transmission Case 1.504 (38.19)
Clutch Pack Clearance
1st & Reverse Brake
A-340E .024-.044 (.61-1.12)
A-340F .020-.040 (.50-1.02)
2nd Brake Clutch
A-340E .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
A-340F .020-.069 (.50-1.76)
Output Shaft End Play .011-.034 (.27-.86)
Piston Stroke
Direct Clutch
A-340E .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
A-340F .041-.052 (1.03-1.33)
Forward Clutch
A-340E .020-.035 (.50-.90)
A-340F .016-.031 (.40-.80)
OD Brake
A-340E .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
A-340F .052-.064 (1.32-1.62)
OD Direct Clutch
A-340E .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
A-340F .070-.082 (1.77-2.07)
2nd Coast Brake
A-340E .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
A-340F .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
Planetary Pinion Gear Clearance .008-.024 (.20-.61)

TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS (T100)


Application In. (mm)
Bushing Diameter (Maximum)
Direct Clutch Drum 2.126 (53.99)
Extension Housing 1.578 (40.09)
Forward Clutch Drum .948 (24.08)
OD Direct Clutch Drum 1.067 (27.11)
OD Planetary Gear .444 (11.27)
Planetary Ring Gear .948 (24.08)
Sun Gear 1.066 (27.08)
Transmission Case 1.504 (38.19)
Clutch Pack Clearance
1st & Reverse Brake
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 98 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
1997-99 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS Toyota A-340 & A-343 Series Overhaul (Trucks)

2WD A-340E .024-.044 (.61-1.12)


4WD A-340F .024-.044 (.61-1.12)
2nd Brake Clutch
2WD A-340E .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
4WD A-340F .024-.078 (.61-1.98)
Output Shaft End Play .011-.034 (.27-.86)
Piston Stroke
Direct Clutch
2WD A-340E .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
4WD A-340F .054-.063 (1.37-1.60)
Forward Clutch
2WD A-340E .020-.035 (.50-.90)
4WD A-340F .020-.035 (.50-.90)
OD Brake
2WD A-340E .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
4WD A-340F .055-.067 (1.40-1.70)
OD Direct Clutch
2WD A-340E .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
4WD A-340F .073-.085 (1.85-2.15)
2nd Coast Brake
2WD A-340E .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
4WD A-340F .059-.118 (1.50-3.00)
Planetary Pinion Gear Clearance .008-.024 (.20-.61)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:28:26 AM Page 99 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

1997 STEERING

Steering Column - LX 450

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Steering Column (1 Of 2)


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:33
2:09:28 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Steering Column (2 Of 2)


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM

CAUTION: When battery is disconnected, vehicle computer and memory systems


may lose memory data. Driveability problems may exist until computer
systems have completed a relearn cycle. See COMPUTER RELEARN
PROCEDURES article in GENERAL INFORMATION before disconnecting
battery.

CAUTION: Never use air bag parts from another vehicle. when replacing parts,
replace with new parts.

NOTE: If the air bag connector is disconnected with the ignition switch at ON, or ACC,
DTCs will be recorded.

ADJUSTMENTS
SPIRAL CABLE

Ensure front wheels are in straight-ahead position. Turn spiral cable counterclockwise until it is hard to turn.
Turn spiral cable clockwise about 3 turns until Red mating mark is aligned. See Fig. 3 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 3: Aligning Marks On Spiral Cable


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION


IGNITION KEY CYLINDER, IGNITION SWITCH & KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID

For component replacement, see INSPECTION& REPLACEMENT under STEERING COLUMN in


OVERHAUL.

STEERING COLUMN

WARNING: To avoid injury from accidental air bag deployment, read and carefully
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

follow all SERVICE PRECAUTIONS. Deactivate air bag system before


performing any repairs. See DISABLING & ACTIVATING AIR BAG SYSTEM
in AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.

WARNING: When removing the wheel pad, take care not to pull the AIRBAG wire
harness.

CAUTION: When storing the wheel pad, keep the upper surface of the pad facing
upward. Never disassemble the wheel pad.

Removal

1. Place the front wheels facing straight ahead. Remove the steering wheel lower number 2 and number 3
cover from the steering wheel. Using a Torx socket wrench, loosen the 2 Torx screws. See Fig. 4 .

Fig. 4: Removing Steering Wheel Pad& Torx Screws


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2. Pull out the wheel pad from the steering wheel and disconnect the air bag connector. See Fig. 5 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 5: Disconnecting The Air Bag Connector


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

3. Disconnect the connector. Remove the steering wheel set nut. Place marks on the steering wheel and main
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

shaft assembly. Using Special Tool 09950-50010 (09951-05010, 09952-05010, 09953-05020, 09954-
05020), remove the steering wheel. See Fig. 6 .

Fig. 6: Removing Steering Wheel


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

4. Disconnect the hood lock control cable and fuel lid control cable. Remove the 4 panel set screws.
Remove the instrument lower finish panel.
5. Remove number 2 heater to register duct.
6. Remove the 5 screws. Remove upper and lower column covers.

CAUTION: Do not disassemble the cable or apply oil to it.

7. Disconnect the combination switch and sprial cable connectors. Disconnect the air bag connector.
Remove the 4 screws and lift out air bag spiral cable.
8. Remove 4 column hole cover set bolts.
9. Working at lower end of steering column at steering gear, remove the 2 bolts and link joint protector. See
Fig. 1 .
10. Place match marks on the yoke sub assembly and steering gear worm gear valve body shaft. Loosen bolt
A and remove bolt B. Disconnect sliding yoke sub assembly. See Fig. 7 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

11. Remove the bolt A. Remove sliding yoke sub assembly. See Fig. 7 .

Fig. 7: Disconnect Sliding Yoke Sub-Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

12. Disconnect the 3 connectors. Remove the 2 column assembly set nuts and 2 set bolts. Remove tilt steering
column assembly.

Installation

1. Install steering column assembly to vehicle. Torque the 2 column assembly set nuts and 2 set boltsto 18
ft. lbs. (25 N.m). Connect the 3 connectors.
2. Install sliding yoke sub assembly at steering gear. Temporarily tighten the bolt A. See Fig. 7 .
3. Connect sliding yoke assembly. Align the match marks on the yoke sub assembly and worm gear valve
body shaft. Torque the bolt B. Torque the bolt A. See Fig. 8 .See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 8: Installing Sliding Yoke Sub-Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

4. Install sliding yoke link joint protector. Torque the 2 bolts. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
5. Torque 4 column hole cover set bolts. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
6. Install combination switch with spiral cable. Tighten the 4 screws. Connect the air bag connector.
Connect the 2 connectors.
7. Install upper and lower column covers. Tighten the 5 screws.
8. Install number 2 heater to register duct.
9. Install instrument lower finish panel. Tighten the 4 panel set screws. Connect the hood lock control cable
and fuel lid control cable.

NOTE: The cable will rotate about 3 turns to either the left or right of the center.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 9: Adjusting Spiral Cable


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

10. Center the spiral cable. Check that the front wheels are facing straight ahead. Turn the cable
counterclockwise by hand until it becomes harder to turn the cable. Then rotate the cable clockwise about
3 turns to align the red marks. See Fig. 9 .
11. Install steering wheel. Align the match marks on the wheel and main shaft assembly. Torque the wheel
set nut. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Connect the electrical connector.

CAUTION: Make sure the wheel pad is installed to the specified torque. If the
wheel pad has been dropper, or there are cracks, dents or other
defects in the case or connector, replace the wheel pad with a new
one. When installing the wheel pad, take care that the wirings do not
interfere with other parts and are not pinched between other parts.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

12. Install sterling wheel pad. Connect the air bag connector. Install the wheel pad after confirming that the
circumference groove of the Torx screws is caught on the screw case. Using a Torx socket wrench, torque
the 2 screws. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . Install the steering wheel lower number 3 and 3
cover. See Fig. 10 .
13. Check steering wheel center point.

Fig. 10: Installing Steering Wheel Pad


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OVERHAUL
STEERING COLUMN

CAUTION: When mounting steering column in a vise, do not overtighten it.

Disassembly

1. Place match marks on the universal joint, intermediate number 2 shaft and main shaft. Remove the 2
bolts. Disconnect universal joint. See Fig. 11 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 11: Disconnecting Universal Joint


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2. Remove the 2 bolts from the dust seal. Remove the hole shield from the hole cover. Remove lower dust
seal, column hole cover and column hole shield. See Fig. 2 .
3. Remove the boltand wiring harness clamp.
4. Using a punch, mark the center of the 2 tapered-head bolts that secure the column upper bracket and
upper clamp. See Fig. 2 . Using a 3-4 mm drill, drill into the 2 bolts. Using a screw extractor, remove the
2 bolts. See Fig. 12 . Remove column upper bracket and column upper clamp.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 12: Removing Column Upper Bracket & Upper Clamp Bolts
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

5. Remove the compression spring bolt. Remove the 2 bushings from the spring. Remove compression
spring. See Fig. 2 .
6. Remove 3 tension springs. See Fig. 2 .
7. Remove the E-ring from the tilt lever lock shaft. See Fig. 2 . Remove the nut from the tilt number 2 bolt.
Remove 2 tilt lever retainers and tilt pawl stoppers. See Fig. 2 .
8. Remove the nut and 2 washers from the tilt pawl bolt. Pull out the bolt. Remove the tilt lever assembly set
bolt. Remove the collar from the tilt pawl. Remove 2 tilt pawls.
9. Remove tilt lever, tilt sub lever, tilt lever assembly and tilt lever lock shaft. See Fig. 2 .
10. Position Special Tool 09910-00015 (09911-00011, 09912-00010), the nut (10 mm nominal diameter, 1.25
mm pitch), plate washer (36 mm outer diameter) and bolt (10 mm nominal diameter, 1.25 mm pitch, 50
mm length). See Fig. 13 . Remove the 2 tilt number 2 bolts by using the sliding hammer on the special
tool. Remove the upper tube with shaft assembly from the column lower tube.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 13: Removing Column Upper Tube With Main Shaft


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

11. Remove the 2 bolts and turn signal bracket.

CAUTION: Do not bend the sliding yoke of the main shaft assembly more than
20 degrees.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 14: Removing Main Shaft Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

12. Using Special Tool 09950-40010 (09957-04010, 09958-04010), compress the compression spring. Using
a snap ring expander, remove the snap ring. Remove the shaft assembly from the column upper tube.
Remove the compression spring, bearing thrust collar and bearing from the shaft assembly. See Fig. 14 .
13. Remove the snap ring and collar from the column lower tube. See Fig. 15 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 15: Removing Snap Ring Collar


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Inspection& Replacement

1. Inspect steering lock operation. Check that the steering lock mechanism operates properly. See Fig. 16 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 16: Inspecting Steering Lock Operation.


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

NOTE: Make sure the key is at the ACC position.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 17: Replacing Key Cylinder


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2. If necessary, replace key cylinder. Place the ignition key at the ACC position. Push down the stop pin
with a screwdriver, and pull out the cylinder. Install a new cylinder. See Fig. 17 .
3. Inspect ignition switch. Inspect key unlock warning switch. See STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article in ACCESSORIES & ELECTRICAL.
4. If necessary, replace ignition switch with key unlock warning switch. Remove the 2 screws. Install a new
switch with the 2 screws.
5.
6. Inspect key interlock solenoid. If necessary, replace key interlock solenoid. Remove the 2 screws.
Remove the solenoid, spring and lock pin. Install a new solenoid with the spring and lock pin, with the 2
screws. See Fig. 18 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 18: Inspecting Key Interlock Solenoid


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

7. If necessary, replace bushing. Using a screwdriver, remove the bushing from the column lower tube. Coat
a new bushing with molybdenum disulfide lithium base grease. Align the holes of the tube and
projections of the bushings. See Fig. 19 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 19: Replacing The Bushings


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Reassembly

CAUTION: When using a vise to hold steering column, do not overtighten it.

1. Coat specifed parts with with molybdenum disulfide lithium base grease. See Fig. 2 .

CAUTION: Do not bend the universal joint of the main shaft more than
20degrees.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 20: Installing Main Shaft Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

2. Install a new bearing, bearing thrust collar and compression spring to the shaft assembly. Install the shaft
assembly into the column upper tube. Using Special Tool 09950-40010 (09957-04010, 09950-04010),
compress the compression spring. Using a snap ring expander, install a new snap ring. Install the main
shaft assembly. See Fig. 20 .
3. Install turn signal bracket. Torque the 2 boltsto 50 INCH lbs. (5.7 N.m).

CAUTION: Select the bolt type to match each number marked in the squares on
the upper tube.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 21: Selecting Tilt Number 2 Bolts


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

4. Select the bolt with plain thread end when the column upper tube mark is 2, and the bolt with the hollow
tipped thread end when the mark is 1. See Fig. 21 .
5. Install the collar to the shaft assembly. Install a new snap ring. Install the upper tube with the shaft
assembly into the column lower tube. See Fig. 22 . Using a plastic hammer, drive in the 2 tilt number 2
bolts. See Fig. 23 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 22: Installing Column Upper Tube With Main Assembly


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 23: Driving In The Tilt No. 2 Bolts


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

6. Install tilt lever lock shaft, tilt lever assembly, tilt sub lever and tilt lever.

NOTE: Install the pawl pin into long hole of the tilt lever/tilt sub lever.

7. Install 2 tilt pawls. Coat the collar with molybdenum disulfide lithium base grease. Install the collar to the
tilt pawl. See Fig. 2 . Install the pawl. Install the bolt through the pawls and tilt lever assembly.
Temporarily install the 2 washers and nut. Torque the tilt lever assembly set boltto 26 INCH lbs. (2.9
N.m).
8. Engage the tilt sub lever side pawl to the center of the ratchet. While turning the tilt lever side tilt pawl
collar, completely engage the tilt lever side pawl to the ratchet. See Fig. 24 .Torque the nut to 52 INCH
lbs. (5.9 N.m).

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 24: Adjusting The Tilt Pawls


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

9. With the tilt pawl and ratchet engaged, install the stopper. Check that the alignment marks on the stopper
and pawl align when the stopper is rotated to the pawl side. See Fig. 25 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 25: Installing Tilt Pawl Stoppers


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

10. If the alignment marks do not align, select stopper according to the table. See Fig. 26 . After selecting the
stoppers, check that on both sides the pawl and ratchet are fully engaged. See Fig. 27 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 26: Tilt Pawl Stoppers Assembly Specifications


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 27: Inspecting Engagement Of Pawl & Ratchet


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

11. Install 2 tilt lever retainers. Install a new E-ring. torque the nutto 11 ft. lbs. (15 N.m).
12. Install 3 tension springs.
13. Install compression spring. Install the 2 bushings to the spring. Torque the boltto 69 INCH lbs. (7.8 N.m).
14. Install column upper bracket and column upper camp. Tighten 2 new tapered head bolts until the bolt
head brakes off. See Fig. 28 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 28: Installing Column Upper Bracket & Upper Clamp


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

15. Install wiring harness clamp. Tighten the bolt.


16. Install column hole shield, column hole cover and lower dust seal. Install the hole shield to the hole
cover. Install the dust seal to the hole cover. Torque 2 bolts to 52 INCH lbs. (5.9 N.m).
17. Connect universal joint. Align the match marks on the intermediate number 2 shaft and universal joint
then torque the bolt. Align the match marks on the universal joint and the main shaft then torque the
boltto 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). See Fig. 29 .
18. Check tilt steering column operation. Check that there is no axial play at the end of the main shaft. With
the main shaft in the neutral position, raise the tilt lever and check that the main shaft raises to the
uppermost position. Lower the main shaft, and check that it locks in the lowermost position.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Fig. 29: Installing Intermediate Shaft Universal Joint


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Intermediate Shaft-To-Main Shaft Universal Joint Bolt 25 (34)
Link Joint Protector Bolts 9 (12)
Steering Column Assembly-To-Support Set Nuts & Bolts 18 (25)
Steering Column Hole Cover Set Bolts 9 (13)
Steering Wheel Set Nut 25 (34)
Steering Column-To-Steering Gear Sliding Yoke Sub-Assembly (1)
Bolt A 25 (34)
Bolt B 25 (34)
Tilt Lever Retainer Nut 11 (15)
INCH Lbs. (N.m)
Compression Spring Bolt 69 (7.8)
Dust Seal Bolt 52 (5.9)
Steering Wheel Pad Screws 78 (9.0)
Tilt Lever Assembly Set Bolt 26 (2.9)
Tilt Lever Side Pawl Nut 52 (5.9)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
1997 STEERING Steering Column - LX 450

Turn Signal Bracket Bolt 50 (5.7)


(1) See Fig. 7 for bolt identification.

SPECIAL TOOLS

Fig. 30: Identifying Special Tools


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:09:28 PM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

SUN ROOF - POWER

1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

NOTE: This article also applies to Lexus LX450. Refer to Land Cruiser, unless
otherwise indicated.

The ignition switch must be in ON position for sun roof to operate. If all doors are closed and ignition switch is
turned off, sun roof will still operate for 60 seconds. The sun roof has a tilt mode and sliding mode. When
closing sun roof in sliding mode, sun roof will stop part way until sun roof switch is pressed a second time.

ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE: Remove sun roof trim plates from top of sun roof opening before making
adjustments.

SUN ROOF HEIGHT

Close sun roof fully. Measure sun roof height. Roof panel should be even with glass weatherstrip within
0.06" (1.5 mm). If adjustment is required, install or remove shims between bracket and sun roof. Recheck sun
roof height.

SUN ROOF CLEARANCE & ALIGNMENT

Closing Clearance

If sun roof closing clearances are unequal between right and left sides, loosen sun roof slider mount nuts. Move
either side forward or backward as required. Tighten sun roof slider mount nuts. Recheck sun roof alignment
and operation.

Front-To-Rear Alignment

If front-to-rear position of sun roof is incorrect, loosen sun roof slider mount nuts. Move sun roof to front or
rear as necessary. Tighten sun roof slider mount nuts.

Side-To-Side Alignment

If sun roof is mounted to right or left of center line in roof opening, loosen sun roof slider mount nuts. Move sun
roof right or left as necessary. Tighten sun roof slider mount nuts.

TROUBLE SHOOTING

NOTE: Ensure all component terminals and ground connections are clean and tight.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:31
1:43:27 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Check possible faults in order listed. Repair or replace components and circuits
as necessary.

POWER SUN ROOF

Sun Roof Does Not Operate, Power Door Locks Normal

Defective GAUGE fuse. Defective ignition switch. Defective POWER fuse. Defective main relay. Defective
sun roof switch. See SUN ROOF SWITCH TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective sun roof control
relay. See CONTROL RELAY TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective motor. See SUN ROOF
MOTOR TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective wiring harness.

Sun Roof & Power Door Locks Do Not Operate

Defective AM1 fuse. Defective POWER fuse. Defective power door lock control relay. Defective wiring
harness.

Sun Roof Operates Abnormally

Defective sun roof control relay. See CONTROL RELAY TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective
limit switch. See LIMIT SWITCH TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective sun roof switch. See SUN
ROOF SWITCH TEST under COMPONENT TESTS.

Sun Roof Stops Halfway When Opening

Defective sun roof control relay. See CONTROL RELAY TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective
limit switch. See LIMIT SWITCH TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective sun roof switch. See SUN
ROOF SWITCH TEST under COMPONENT TESTS. Defective motor. See SUN ROOF MOTOR TEST
under COMPONENT TESTS.

Sun Roof Power Reserve Does Not Operate

Defective POWER fuse. Defective door lock control relay. Defective GAUGE fuse. Defective ignition switch.
Defective door courtesy switch. Defective wiring harness.

COMPONENT TESTING
CONTROL RELAY TEST

See CONTROL RELAY LOCATION table for relay location. Unplug relay connector. Check for continuity or
voltage as indicated at control relay connector terminals with sun roof switch or limit switch in specified
positions. See CONTROL RELAY TEST table. If test results are as specified, replace control relay. If test
results are not as specified, repair or replace appropriate switch or wire. See Fig. 1 .

CONTROL RELAY LOCATION


Model Location

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Land Cruiser To Left Of Motor

CONTROL RELAY TEST


Terminal No. & Switch Position Condition
1: Slide (1)
Off Or Close No Continuity
Open Continuity
2: Slide (1)
Off Or Open No Continuity
Close Continuity
3: Tilt (1)
Off Or Down No Continuity
Up Continuity
4 (1) No Continuity
4&5 Continuity
5 (1) No Continuity
6 (1)
Ignition Switch LOCK Or ACC No Voltage
Ignition Switch ON Battery Voltage
7: Tilt (1)
Off Or Up No Continuity
Down Continuity
8: No. 1 Limit Switch (1)
Off No Continuity
On Continuity
9: No. 2 Limit Switch (1)
Off No Continuity
On Continuity
11 (1) Continuity
12 (1) Battery Voltage
(1) Terminal connected to ground.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Fig. 1: Identifying Control Relay Connector Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

SUN ROOF MOTOR TEST

Unplug sun roof motor connector. Using fused jumper wires, connect positive battery lead to sun roof motor
terminal No. 1 and negative lead to terminal No. 3. See Fig. 2 . Motor should rotate smoothly. Transpose
jumper wires. Motor should rotate smoothly in opposite direction. Replace motor if operation is not as
specified.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Fig. 2: Identifying Sun Roof Motor Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

LIMIT SWITCH TEST

1. Unplug switch connector. See Fig. 3 . For limit switch No. 1, continuity should not exist between
terminals No. 1 and 5 with switch pin released. With pin pressed in, continuity should exist between
terminals No. 1 and 5.
2. For limit switch No. 2, continuity should not exist between terminals No. 4 and 5 with switch pin
released. With pin pressed in, continuity should exist between terminals No. 4 and 5. Replace switch if
continuity is not as specified.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Fig. 3: Identifying Limit Switch Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

SUN ROOF SWITCH TEST

Remove power sun roof switch. Check for continuity between switch terminals with switch in specified
positions. If continuity is not as specified, replace switch. See SUN ROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST
table. See Fig. 4 .

SUN ROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST


Position Terminal Continuity
Slide
Off (1) *

Open 3&4
Close 4&6
Tilt
Off (1) *

Up 4&5
Down 2&4
(1) No continuity.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Fig. 4: Identifying Sun Roof Switch Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION


DRIVE CABLES

Removal & Installation

See SUN ROOF .

DRIVE MOTOR

Removal & Installation

See SUN ROOF .

SUN ROOF SWITCH

NOTE: Tape the end of a flat-blade screwdriver to protect switch and trim panels
during removal.

Removal & Installation

Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove screw from sun roof switch assembly (if equipped). Pry sun roof
switch assembly from roof panel. Remove screws and switch from switch panel. Unplug switch connector. To
install, reverse removal procedure.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

SUN ROOF

NOTE: For installation reference, note number and position of shims when removing
sun roof.

Removal & Installation

1. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove back door scuff plate. Remove No. 2 rear seat (if equipped).
Carefully remove left and right quarter trim panels by releasing clips along outer edges. Remove rear seat
side trim. Remove rear door scuff plate. Remove cowl side trim. Remove front and rear door opening
trim. Remove center pillar lower trim.
2. Remove front seat shoulder belt outer anchor. Remove center pillar upper trim. Remove front seat
shoulder belt adjuster. Remove rear seat shoulder belt outer anchor. Remove No. 2 rear seat shoulder belt
outer anchor (if equipped). Remove quarter pillar trim. Remove rear pillar trim. Remove assist grips.
3. Remove front pillar trim. Remove sun visors, rear view mirror, and interior lights. Remove back door
trim. Remove sun roof opening trim moldings. Remove sun roof switch. See SUN ROOF SWITCH .
Release 7 clips and remove headliner. Remove drive gear assembly. Remove side trim plates. Remove
sun roof mounting nuts and shims. Pull upward on sun roof glass and remove.
4. Remove drip channel. Remove wind deflector. Remove cable guide casing assembly. Remove sunshade
trim. Remove drive rail. To install, reverse removal procedure.

WIND DEFLECTOR

Removal & Installation

See SUN ROOF .

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
SUN ROOF - POWER 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Power Sun Roofs

Fig. 5: Power Sun Roof System Wiring Diagram

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:43:27 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS

1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

INTRODUCTION
Before testing separate components or systems, perform basic diagnostic procedures in BASIC TESTING
article. Since many computer-controlled and monitored components set a diagnostic trouble code if they
malfunction, also perform self-diagnostics in TESTS W/CODES article.

NOTE: Testing individual components does not isolate short or open circuits. Perform
all voltage tests with a Digital Volt-Ohmmeter (DVOM) with a minimum 10-
megohm input impedance, unless stated otherwise in test procedure. Use
ohmmeter to isolate shorted or open wiring harness.

COMPUTERIZED ENGINE CONTROLS


ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

Power & Ground Circuits

For testing of Engine Control Module (ECM) power and ground circuits, see PIN VOLTAGE CHARTS
article. See ECM LOCATION table for identifying ECM mounting locations.

ECM LOCATION
Model Location
LX 450/Land Cruiser Above Glove Box, Near Passenger's Side Of
Instrument Panel

ENGINE SENSORS & SWITCHES


AIRFLOW METER

NOTE: Airflow meter may be referred to as Mass Airflow (MAF) meter.

1. Turn ignition off. Disconnect electrical connector from airflow meter. Airflow meter is located at
passenger's side front corner of engine compartment, between air intake hose and the upper cap on air
cleaner assembly.
2. Note airflow meter terminal identification. See Fig. 1 . Using ohmmeter, check resistance between
terminals E2 and THA. Resistance should be within specification in relation to the temperature. See
AIRFLOW METER RESISTANCE table. Replace airflow meter if resistance is not within
specification.
3. To check airflow meter operation, ensure electrical connector is installed on airflow meter. Connect
voltmeter leads between proper terminals on airflow meter with electrical connector installed. See Fig. 2 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:31
2:23:20 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

4. Turn ignition on. Apply air into airflow meter and note voltage reading. See Fig. 2 . While air is being
applied, voltage reading should fluctuate. Replace airflow meter if voltage does not fluctuate. Turn
ignition off. Remove voltmeter.

AIRFLOW METER RESISTANCE


Application & Terminals Ohms
E2-THA
-4°F (-20°C) 10,000-20,000
32°F (0°C) 4000-7000
68°F (20°C) 2000-3000
104°F (40°C) 900-1300
140°F (60°C) 400-700
176°F (80°C) 200-400

Fig. 1: Identifying Airflow Meter Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 2: Testing Airflow Meter Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

Camshaft position sensor is a pick-up coil located in the distributor. For checking of pick-up coil, see PICK-UP
COIL RESISTANCE and PICK-UP COIL AIR GAP under IGNITION CHECKS (DISTRIBUTOR TYPE
IGNITION SYSTEM) in BASIC TESTING article.

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

For testing crankshaft position sensor, see CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR under IGNITION CHECKS
(DISTRIBUTOR TYPE IGNITION SYSTEM) in BASIC TESTING article.

EGR GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove EGR gas temperature sensor. The EGR gas temperature is screwed into a gas passage, near the
EGR valve. Place threaded end of EGR gas temperature sensor and thermometer in container of oil.
2. Attach ohmmeter between electrical terminals on EGR gas temperature sensor. Heat oil and note
resistance at specified temperature. See EGR GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE table.
Replace EGR gas temperature sensor if resistance is not within specification. Reinstall EGR gas
temperature sensor and tighten to 15 ft. lbs. (20 N.m).

EGR GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE


Temperature °F (°C) Ohms
122 (50) 64,000-97,000
212 (100) 11,000-16,000

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

302 (150) 2000-4000

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR

1. Ensure ignition is off. Disconnect electrical connector from ECT sensor. See ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR LOCATION table. To verify wire colors for proper sensor
identification, see appropriate wiring diagram in WIRING DIAGRAMS article.

NOTE: The ECT sensor may be also identified using appropriate illustration in
THEORY/OPERATION article.

2. Drain cooling system and remove ECT sensor. Place probe end of ECT sensor and thermometer in
container of water. Attach ohmmeter between electrical terminals on ECT sensor. Heat water and note
that resistance is within specification in relation to temperature. See Fig. 3 . Replace ECT sensor if
resistance is not within specification.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR LOCATION


Model Location
LX 450/Land Cruiser Rear Sensor On Cylinder Head, Just Below Intake
Manifold, Above Oil Filter & Contains Green 2-Pin
Electrical Connector

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 3: Checking Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Two heated oxygen sensors are used. A heated oxygen sensor is used on exhaust pipe in front of front
catalytic converter. This oxygen sensor is referred to as the No. 1 oxygen sensor or front oxygen sensor.
Another heated oxygen sensor is located on exhaust pipe behind rear catalytic converter. This oxygen
sensor is referred to as the No. 2 oxygen sensor or the rear oxygen sensor.
2. If a problem exists with No. 1 or 2 heated oxygen sensors, a diagnostic trouble code will be stored in
Engine Control Module (ECM). For diagnostic trouble code diagnosis, see TESTS W/CODES article.
3. To test the heater on the No. 1 or 2 oxygen sensors, disconnect electrical connector for appropriate heated
oxygen sensor. See Fig. 4 . Note terminals on heated oxygen sensor. See Fig. 4 .
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

4. Using ohmmeter, check resistance between heated oxygen sensor terminals +B and HT. See Fig. 4 .
Replace heated oxygen sensor if resistance is not 11-16 ohms at 68°F (20°C).

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 4: Checking Heater On Heated Oxygen Sensor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

KNOCK SENSOR

1. Knock sensor(s) are located on driver's side of the cylinder block, just below cylinder head. See Fig. 5 .
Manufacturer recommends removing knock sensor from cylinder block before testing. See KNOCK
SENSOR under ENGINE SENSORS & SWITCHES in REMOVE/INSTALL/OVERHAUL article.
2. Using ohmmeter, check that no continuity exists between electrical terminal on knock sensor and body of
knock sensor. Replace knock sensor if continuity exists.

Fig. 5: Locating Knock Sensors


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT

If problem exists with Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch or circuit, a diagnostic trouble Code P1780 will be
stored in the Engine Control Module (ECM). For diagnostic trouble code diagnosis, see TESTS W/CODES
article.

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

1. Disconnect electrical connector from Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch. PNP switch is mounted on side
of transmission. Note terminal identification. See Fig. 6 .
2. Using ohmmeter, check for continuity between specified terminals with shift lever in proper positions.
See PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS table. If proper continuity cannot
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

obtained, adjust or replace switch as necessary.

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS


Shift Lever Position Terminal Continuity
Park 5 & 6; 4 & 7
Reverse 4&8
Neutral 5 & 6; 4 & 10
Drive 4&9
2 2&4
Low 3&4

Fig. 6: Identifying Typical Park/Neutral Position Switch Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

PICK-UP COILS

See PICK-UP COIL AIR GAP and PICK-UP COIL RESISTANCE under IGNITION CHECKS
(DISTRIBUTOR TYPE IGNITION SYSTEM) in BASIC TESTING article.

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Ensure ignition is off. Disconnect electrical connector from Throttle Position (TP) sensor. TP sensor is
located on throttle body. Note terminal identification on TP sensor. See Fig. 7 .
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

2. Apply vacuum to throttle opener. Insert specified thickness feeler gauge between throttle stop screw and
throttle lever, and check resistance or continuity. See TP SENSOR RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
table. Replace or adjust TP sensor if not within specification.

TP SENSOR RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application Type Clearance In. (mm) Terminals Tested Ohmmeter Reading
4.5L Fully Closed VTA & E2 200-5700
" .020 (.50) IDL & E2 2300 Or Less
" .030 (.75) IDL & E2 No Continuity
" Fully Open VTA & E2 2000-10,200
" " VC & E2 2500-5900
(1) Apply vacuum to throttle opener before testing TP sensor.

Fig. 7: Testing Throttle Position Sensor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

1. Vehicle speed sensor is located on transmission and contains a 3-pin electrical connector. Connect
voltmeter and battery voltage to vehicle speed sensor terminals. See Fig. 8 .
2. While rotating vehicle speed sensor shaft, ensure voltage changes from zero to at least 11 volts. Voltage
should change 4 times per revolution of the shaft. Replace vehicle speed sensor if voltage does not change
as specified.

Fig. 8: Testing Vehicle Speed Sensor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

RELAYS
CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY

1. Turn ignition off. Remove circuit opening relay from relay box behind driver's side kick panel. See Fig.
9.
2. To check circuit opening relay continuity, use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals.
Perform STEP 1. See Fig. 10 .
3. To check circuit opening relay operation, apply battery voltage and ground to specified terminals on relay
and use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals. Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 10 .
Replace circuit opening relay if defective.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 9: Locating Circuit Opening Relay


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 10: Testing Circuit Opening Relay Or EFI Main Relay


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

EFI MAIN RELAY

1. Ensure ignition is off. Remove EFI main relay from fuse/relay box at driver's side front corner of engine
compartment, near the battery.
2. To test EFI main relay continuity, use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals. See
Fig. 10 .
3. To test EFI main relay operation, apply battery voltage and ground to specified terminals on EFI main
relay and use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals. See Fig. 10 . Replace EFI main
relay if defective.

FUEL PUMP RELAY

1. Ensure ignition is off. Remove fuel pump relay. Fuel pump relay is bolted to fender on driver's side of
engine compartment, just above fenderwell and contains a Black 4-pin electrical connector.

NOTE: Fuel pump relay may be identified using appropriate illustration in


THEORY/OPERATION article.

2. To check fuel pump relay continuity, use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals. See
Fig. 11 .
3. To test fuel pump relay operation, apply battery voltage and ground to specified terminals on fuel pump
relay and use ohmmeter to check continuity between specified terminals. See Fig. 11 . Replace fuel pump
relay if defective.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 11: Testing Fuel Pump Relay


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL DELIVERY

Circuit Opening Relay

See CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY under RELAYS.

EFI Main Relay

See EFI MAIN RELAY under RELAYS.

Fuel Pump Pressure

For fuel pump pressure testing, see BASIC TESTING article.

Fuel Pump Resistance & Operation

1. Remove second seat, scuff plate, step plate, floor mats and cover plate on floor panel for access to
electrical connector at fuel pump. Disconnect electrical connector for fuel pump.
2. To test fuel pump resistance, use ohmmeter to check resistance between specified terminals on electrical
connector for fuel pump. See Fig. 12 . Replace fuel pump if resistance is not .20-3.00 ohms at 68°F (20°
C).

CAUTION: When testing fuel pump operation, DO NOT apply battery voltage to
fuel pump for more than 10 seconds, or fuel pump may be damaged.
When testing fuel pump operation, keep fuel pump away from battery
as far as possible.

3. To test fuel pump operation, apply battery voltage and ground to (+) and (-) terminals on electrical
connector for fuel pump. See Fig. 12 . DO NOT apply battery voltage to fuel pump for more than 10
seconds. Keep fuel pump away from battery as far as possible. Replace fuel pump if fuel pump does not
operate.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 12: Testing Fuel Pump Resistance & Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fuel Pump Relay

See FUEL PUMP RELAY under RELAYS.

Fuel Pump Resistor

1. Ensure ignition is off. Disconnect electrical connector at fuel pump resistor. Fuel pump resistor is located
on passenger's side of engine compartment, near fenderwell and cruise control actuator. See Fig. 13 . Fuel
pump resistor contains a Dark Gray 2-pin electrical connector.
2. Using ohmmeter, check resistance between terminals on electrical connector for fuel pump resistor.
Replace fuel pump resistor if resistance is not .70-.76 ohms at 68°F (20°C).

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 13: Locating Fuel Pump Resistor


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FUEL CONTROL

Fuel Injectors

1. Ensure ignition is off. Disconnect electrical connector at fuel injector. Using ohmmeter, check resistance
between electrical terminals on fuel injector. Replace fuel injector if resistance is not within specification.
See FUEL INJECTOR RESISTANCE table.
2. To check fuel injector volume, remove fuel injector. See FUEL RAILS & FUEL INJECTORS under
FUEL SYSTEM in REMOVE/INSTALL/OVERHAUL article. Disconnect fuel hose from fuel filter
outlet. Use Delivery Hose (09268-41046) to install fuel injector between fuel filter and fuel pressure
regulator. See Fig. 14 .
3. Place fuel injector into a clean graduated container. Place vinyl tube on end of fuel injector to prevent fuel
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

spillage.
4. Use scan tool to operate the fuel pump to pressurize the fuel system. See FUEL PRESSURE under FUEL
SYSTEM in BASIC TESTING article.

NOTE: Fuel pump may also be operated to pressurize fuel system by applying
battery voltage to electrical terminals on fuel pump. For operating of fuel
pump, see FUEL PUMP RESISTANCE & OPERATION under FUEL
DELIVERY under FUEL SYSTEM.

5. Connect Fuel Injector Tester (09842-30070) to fuel injector for 15 seconds. See Fig. 15 . Measure fuel
injector volume. Test each fuel injector 2-3 times. Replace fuel injector if fuel injector volume is not
within specification. See FUEL INJECTOR VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS table.

NOTE: Ensure difference between fuel injector volume on all fuel injectors is
within specification. See FUEL INJECTOR VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS
table.

6. Disconnect fuel injector tester. Ensure fuel leakage from end of fuel injector is one drop or less per
minute. Replace fuel injector if leakage exceeds specification. Remove test equipment.

FUEL INJECTOR RESISTANCE


Application Ohms @ 68°F (20°C)
LX 450/Land Cruiser 13.4-14.2

FUEL INJECTOR VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS


Application Cu. In. (cc)
LX 450/Land Cruiser 4.2-5.4 (69-88)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 14: Connections For Testing Fuel Injector


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 15: Connecting Fuel Injector Tester


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

NOTE: Fuel pressure control system may also be referred to as fuel pressure-up
system.

Fuel Pressure Control System

1. Fuel pressure control system uses a fuel pressure control Vacuum Switching Valve (VSV). Fuel pressure
control VSV is supplied voltage through EFI main relay.
2. The Engine Control Module (ECM) will activate VSV by controlling ground circuit for approximately
90-180 seconds when restarting engine at normal operating temperature. Locate and remove fuel pressure
control VSV. See FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VSV LOCATION table. See Fig. 16 .

NOTE: Fuel pressure control VSV may also be identified by using proper wire
color. See appropriate wiring diagram in WIRING DIAGRAMS article.

FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VSV LOCATION


Application Location
LX 450/Land Cruiser Below Air Intake Chamber At
Front Lower Side Of Intake
Manifold, Near Dipstick &
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Contains Brown 2-Pin


Electrical Connector

Fig. 16: Locating Fuel Pressure Control VSV


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

3. Using ohmmeter, ensure continuity exists between electrical terminals on fuel pressure control VSV and
resistance is within specification. See FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VSV RESISTANCE table.
Replace fuel pressure control VSV if no continuity exists or resistance is not within specification.
4. Ensure no continuity exists between each electrical terminal and body of fuel pressure control VSV.
Replace fuel pressure control VSV if continuity exists between electrical terminal and body of fuel
pressure control VSV.
5. To test fuel pressure control VSV operation, apply air pressure to port "E". Ensure air flows from port
"G" and not from the filter. Perform STEP 1. See Fig. 17 .
6. Apply battery voltage and ground to electrical terminals on fuel pressure control VSV. Apply air pressure
to port "E". Ensure air flows from filter and not from port "G". Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 17 . Replace
fuel pressure control VSV if defective.

FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VSV RESISTANCE


Application Ohms @ 68°F (20°C)
LX 450/Land Cruiser 37-44

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 17: Testing Fuel Pressure Control VSV


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fuel Cut System

1. When checking fuel cut system, engine RPM must be monitored. Scan tool is connected to data link
connector No. 3 for monitoring engine RPM. For connecting of scan tool, see IDLE SPEED &
MIXTURE in ADJUSTMENTS article.
2. Start and warm engine to normal operating temperature. Ensure the A/C and all accessories are off.
Gradually increase engine RPM to maintain at least specified engine speed. See FUEL CUT SYSTEM
TESTING SPECIFICATIONS table.

FUEL CUT SYSTEM TESTING SPECIFICATIONS


Application Engine RPM
LX 450/Land Cruiser 3500

3. Using stethoscope, check for fuel injector operating sound. Ensure when throttle lever is released, fuel
injector stops operating momentarily and then resumes operating (fuel return RPM).
4. Ensure fuel return RPM is within specification. See FUEL CUT SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS table.
Shut engine off. Remove test equipment.

FUEL CUT SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS (1)


Application Fuel Return RPM
LX 450/Land Cruiser 1200
(1) Check with engine at normal operating temperature and with A/C and all accessories off.

IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM


IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE

NOTE: IAC valve is located on side of throttle body, near throttle position sensor. See
Fig. 18 .

1. Listen for clicking sound at IAC valve immediately after engine is shut off. If no clicking sound is heard,
check IAC valve resistance and operation.
2. To test IAC valve resistance, ensure ignition is off. Disconnect electrical connector from IAC valve.
Using ohmmeter, check resistance between specified terminals. See IAC VALVE RESISTANCE
SPECIFICATIONS table. See Fig. 18 . Replace IAC valve if resistance is not within specification.

IAC VALVE RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS


Terminals Ohms
B1 To S1 & S3
Cold 15-25
(1)

Hot (2) 20-30


B2 To S2 & S4
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Cold 15-25
(1)

Hot (2) 20-30


(1) Cold is with temperature of
14-122°F (-10-50°C).
(2) Hot is with temperature of
122-212°F (50-100°C).

3. To test IAC valve operation, remove IAC valve. Apply battery voltage to terminals B1 and B2. See Fig.
19 . Repeatedly ground terminals in sequence, and ensure IAC valve closes and opens. See IAC VALVE
GROUNDING SEQUENCE table. See Fig. 19 . Replace IAC valve if defective.

IAC VALVE GROUNDING SEQUENCE


Terminal Grounding
Application Sequence
To Close IAC Valve S1-S2-S3-S4-S1
To Open IAC Valve S4-S3-S2-S1-S4

4. If IAC valve resistance is within specification and IAC valve operates correctly, check wiring between
Engine Control Module (ECM) and IAC valve. See appropriate wiring diagram in WIRING
DIAGRAMS article.
5. ECM is located above glove box, near passenger's side of instrument panel.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 18: Locating IAC Valve & Identifying IAC Valve Terminals
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:20 PM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 19: Testing IAC Valve Operation


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

IGNITION SYSTEM
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

NOTE: For basic ignition checks, see BASIC TESTING article.

TIMING CONTROL SYSTEMS

Knock Sensor

See KNOCK SENSOR under ENGINE SENSORS & SWITCHES.

EMISSION SYSTEMS & SUB-SYSTEMS


EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM TEST

NOTE: EGR systems contain different components depending on application. See Fig.
20 . When testing EGR system and components, use proper illustration to
determine component location.

NOTE: When testing EGR vacuum modulator, it may be necessary to monitor engine
RPM by using scan tool. For scan tool connections, see IDLE SPEED &
MIXTURE in ADJUSTMENTS article.

1. Ensure EGR vacuum modulator filter is clean and in good condition. Clean filter with compressed air (if
necessary).

NOTE: EGR vacuum modulator filter must be installed with coarse side facing
upward, away from EGR vacuum modulator.

2. Using 3-way connector, install vacuum gauge in line with vacuum hose between top of EGR valve and
EGR vacuum modulator. Start engine. Ensure engine runs idles smoothly to ensure proper seating of
EGR valve.
3. Ensure engine coolant temperature is less than 117°F (47°C). Start and operate engine at 2500 RPM.
Ensure no vacuum reading is obtained with engine at 2500 RPM. The EGR pipe should not be hot.
4. Warm engine so engine coolant temperature is greater than 127°F (53°C). Operate engine at 2500 RPM
and note vacuum reading. Ensure low vacuum reading is now obtained.
5. Disconnect vacuum hose from port "R" on EGR vacuum modulator. See Fig. 21 . Using additional hose,
connect port "R" on EGR vacuum modulator directly to intake manifold. High vacuum reading should be
now be obtained with engine at 2500 RPM.

NOTE: Engine should misfire due to large amounts of exhaust gas being injected
into intake manifold.

6. Remove vacuum hose and reconnect original vacuum hose to EGR vacuum modulator. To check EGR
valve operation, remove and plug vacuum hose at top of EGR valve.
7. Using vacuum pump, apply vacuum directly to EGR valve with engine idling. Engine should run rough or
stall. If EGR system does not operate as described, each individual component should be tested.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Reconnect vacuum hose at EGR valve.


8. Diagnostic trouble code may have been set in Engine Control Module (ECM) while testing EGR system
and Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on instrument panel may have come on. Clear DTC from ECM.
See TESTS W/CODES article.

Fig. 20: Locating Emission System Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 21: Identifying Ports & Testing EGR Vacuum Modulator


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR

See EGR GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR under ENGINE SENSORS & SWITCHES.

EGR VACUUM MODULATOR

NOTE: When testing EGR vacuum modulator, it may be necessary to monitor engine
RPM by using scan tool. For scan tool connections, see IDLE SPEED &
MIXTURE in ADJUSTMENTS article.

1. Mark vacuum hose locations and disconnect vacuum hoses from EGR vacuum modulator. Block ports
"P" and "R" on EGR vacuum modulator. See Fig. 21 .

NOTE: Ports "P" and "R" are the double ports on side of EGR vacuum modulator.
Port "Q" is single port on side of EGR vacuum modulator.

2. Apply air pressure to port "Q". See Fig. 21 . Air should flow freely through air filter side of EGR vacuum
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

modulator.
3. Start and operate engine at specified RPM. See EGR VACUUM MODULATOR TESTING
SPECIFICATIONS table. Repeat test procedures in steps 1) and 2). Strong resistance of airflow should
be felt. Replace EGR vacuum modulator if resistance is not felt. Reconnect vacuum hoses to proper
locations.

EGR VACUUM MODULATOR TESTING SPECIFICATIONS


Application Engine RPM
LX 450/Land Cruiser 2500

EGR VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE (VSV)

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses and electrical connector from EGR VSV. EGR VSV is located on intake
manifold, below air intake chamber and contains a Dark Blue 2-pin electrical connector. See Fig. 20 and
Fig. 22 . It may be necessary to remove air intake chamber to access EGR VSV.
2. Using ohmmeter, check that continuity exists between electrical terminals on EGR VSV and that
resistance is within specification. See EGR VSV RESISTANCE table. Replace EGR VSV if no
continuity exists or resistance is not within specification.
3. Using ohmmeter, ensure no continuity exists between each electrical terminal and body of the EGR VSV.
Replace EGR VSV if continuity exists between any electrical terminal and body of EGR VSV.
4. To test EGR VSV operation, apply air pressure to port "G". Ensure air flows from port "E". Perform
STEP 1. See Fig. 23 . Apply battery voltage and ground to electrical terminals on EGR VSV. Apply air
pressure to port "G". Ensure air does not flow from port "E". Perform STEP 2. See Fig. 23 . Replace EGR
VSV if defective.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 22: Locating EGR VSV


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 32 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 33 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 23: Testing EGR VSV


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

EGR VSV RESISTANCE


Application Ohms @ 68°F (20°C)
LX 450/Land Cruiser 30-34

FUEL EVAPORATION SYSTEM

Charcoal Canister

1. Disconnect hoses from charcoal canister. Check for clogged filter and/or stuck check valve by applying
low air pressure to port "A". See Fig. 24 . Ensure air flows freely from other ports on charcoal canister.
2. Apply low air pressure to port "B" while holding port "C" closed. See Fig. 24 . Ensure air flows freely
from port "A". Replace charcoal canister if defective.
3. To clean charcoal canister filter, apply 43 psi (3 kg/cm2 ) air pressure to port "A" while holding port "B"
closed. Air should flow from port "C". Ensure no activated carbon comes out of charcoal canister. DO
NOT attempt to wash out charcoal canister.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 34 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 24: Identifying Charcoal Canister Ports


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

EVAP Check Valve

1. Remove EVAP check valve from vacuum hose to EVAP Vacuum Control Valve (VCV). The EVAP
VCV is located on bracket, below air intake chamber, near engine oil dipstick. See Fig. 20 .
2. Apply air pressure to Orange colored side of EVAP check valve. Air should flow through EVAP check
valve. Apply air pressure to Black colored side of EVAP check valve. Air should not flow through EVAP
check valve. Replace EVAP check valve if defective. The EVAP check valve should be installed with
Black colored side toward the EVAP vacuum control valve.

EVAP Thermal Vacuum Valve

1. Drain cooling system. Remove EVAP Thermal Vacuum Valve (EVAP TVV). The EVAP TVV is located
in coolant passage on cylinder head. See Fig. 20 .
2. Use cool water to cool threaded end of EVAP TVV to less than 113°F (45°C). Apply air pressure to
lower vacuum hose port on EVAP TVV. Ensure EVAP TVV is closed and air flows from the air filter
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 35 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

located on top of EVAP TVV.


3. Heat water to greater than 147°F (64°C). Apply air pressure to lower vacuum hose port on EVAP TVV.
Ensure EVAP TVV is open and air flows through upper vacuum hose port and not through air filter.
Replace EVAP TVV if defective. Apply thread sealant to threads of EVAP TVV and reinstall. Tighten
EVAP TVV to 21 ft. lbs. (29 N.m). Fill cooling system.

EVAP Vacuum Control Valve

1. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Disconnect vacuum hose from union pipe at EVAP
Vacuum Control Valve (VCV). See Fig. 25 . With engine idling, ensure no suction exists on union pipe at
EVAP VCV.
2. Gradually increase engine to 3000 RPM. Ensure suction now exists on union pipe. If suction does not
exist, remove EVAP VCV. Using vacuum pump, apply 2.8 in. Hg of vacuum to port "S" on EVAP VCV.
See Fig. 25 .
3. Apply air pressure to port "Y". Ensure air flows from port "Z". Remove vacuum pump. Apply air pressure
to port "Y". Ensure air does not flow from port "Z". Replace EVAP VCV if defective and recheck
operation.

Fig. 25: Testing EVAP Vacuum Control Valve


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 36 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

1. Remove PCV valve. Apply air pressure to PCV valve at cylinder head side of PCV valve. Ensure air
flows easily through PCV valve.
2. Apply air pressure to PCV valve at intake manifold side of PCV valve. Ensure air flows through PCV
valve with some resistance. Replace PCV valve if valve does not function as described.

THROTTLE CONTROLS
DASHPOT CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Ensure idle speed is within specification. See IDLE
SPEED & MIXTURE in ADJUSTMENTS article.
2. With engine idling, open throttle valve on throttle body until throttle lever separates from end of dashpot.
Dashpot is located on throttle body, just below the throttle cables. See Fig. 26 . Gradually release throttle
valve and note dashpot setting RPM when throttle lever contacts dashpot.
3. Dashpot setting RPM should be 1900-2500 RPM. If dashpot setting RPM is not within specification, shut
engine off. Loosen lock nut and rotate stopper bolt. See Fig. 26 .
4. Repeat step 2) until proper adjustment is obtained. Tighten lock nut. To check throttle body Vacuum
Transmitting Valve (VTV) operation, operate engine at 3500 RPM. Release throttle. Ensure engine
returns to proper idle speed in a few seconds.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 37 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

Fig. 26: Locating Dashpot & Adjusting Stopper Bolt


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

THROTTLE OPENER

1. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Ensure idle speed is within specification. See IDLE
SPEED & MIXTURE in ADJUSTMENTS article.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 38 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
I - SYSTEM/COMPONENT TESTS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - System & Component Testing - 6-Cyl.

2. Disconnect and plug vacuum hose at throttle opener located on throttle body. See Fig. 27 . Start engine
and note engine speed. Engine speed should be 700-1000 RPM.
3. Replace throttle body if engine speed is not within specification. Shut engine off. Reinstall vacuum hose
on throttle opener. Start engine and ensure engine returns to proper idle speed.

Fig. 27: Locating Throttle Opener & Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:23:21 PM Page 39 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
M - VACUUM DIAGRAMS 1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - Vacuum Diagrams

M - VACUUM DIAGRAMS

1997 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Toyota - Vacuum Diagrams

VACUUM DIAGRAMS

Fig. 1: Vacuum Diagram


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 2:22:41
2:22:30 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES

1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications & Procedures

RIDING HEIGHT
RIDING HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

Before adjusting alignment, measure riding height. Riding height must be measured with vehicle on level floor
and tires properly inflated. Bounce vehicle several times to allow suspension to settle.

Visually inspect vehicle for signs of abnormal height from front to rear or side to side. Check passenger and
luggage compartments for extra heavy items, and remove them if present. If riding height is not within
specification, inspect and repair or replace suspension components. See RIDING HEIGHT
SPECIFICATIONS .

RIDING HEIGHT MEASUREMENT POINTS

Avalon, Camry, Celica & Corolla

Measure front riding height from ground to center of lower control arm mounting bolt/nut. Measure rear riding
height from ground to center of forward strut rod mounting bolt. Strut rod is parallel to side body panel.

Land Cruiser/LX470

On 1997 models, measure riding height at specified locations. See Fig. 1 . Dimension "A" is follow spring
clearance. Dimension "B" is bumper stopper clearance.

On 1998 models, front riding height specification is difference between spindle center height and lower control
mounting bolt center height. Rear riding height specification is difference between rear axle shaft center height
and trailing arm front mount bolt center height.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:41
8:43:37 AM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 1: Riding Height Measurement Points (1997 Land Cruiser)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Paseo, Sienna & Tercel

Measure front riding height from ground to center of lower arm mounting bolt. Measure rear riding height from
ground to center of rear lower control arm forward mounting bolt.

RAV4

Measure front riding height from ground to center of lower arm mounting bolt. Measure rear riding height from
ground to center of body side No. 1 suspension arm mounting bolt.

Supra

Measure front riding height from ground to center of lower suspension arm mounting bolt. Measure rear riding
height from ground to center of No. 2 lower suspension arm mounting bolt.

Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner

1. Measure front riding height by subtracting height at center of lower arm adjuster cam bolt from height at
center tip of spindle. See Fig. 2 .
2. Measure rear riding height by subtracting height at center of front leaf spring mounting bolt from height
at center line of rear axle shaft. The difference between measurements is riding height.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 2: Riding Height Measurement Points (Tacoma Shown; T100 & 4Runner Are Similar)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (CARS)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
Avalon 8.43 (214) 10.47 (266)
Camry
P195/70R14 8.35 (212) 10.39 (264)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

P205/65R15 8.46 (215) 10.49 (266)


Celica
P185/70R14 7.39 (187.6) 10.07 (255.8)
P205/75R15 7.19 (182.6) 9.84 (250)
Corolla
175/65R14 7.28 (185) 9.65 (245)
185/65R14 (85S) 7.48 (190) 9.84 (250)
Paseo (185/60R14) 7.40 (188) 9.80 (249)
Supra
Non-Turbo 7.32 (186) 9.68 (246)
Turbo 7.40 (188) 10.00 (254)
Tercel
155SR13 7.63 (194) 9.92 (252)
175/65R14 7.76 (197) 9.96 (253)
185/60R14 7.56 (192) 9.84 (250)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER/LX470)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997 1.42 (36) 4.09 (104)
1998 2.80 (71) 2.01 (51)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (PREVIA)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
P205/75R14 9.37 (238) 11.06 (281)
P215/65R15 9.33 (237) 10.98 (279)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (RAV4)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
2WD (215/70R16) 8.94 (227) 13.90 (353)
4WD
215/70R16 9.33 (237) 14.17 (360)
235/60R16 8.58 (218) 13.62 (346)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (SIENNA)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
205/70R15 9.06 (230) 12.76 (324)
215/65R15 8.90 (226) 12.60 (320)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA 2WD)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997-98

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

2.4L Reg Cab 1.73 (44) 2.40 (61)


2.4L Xtra Cab 1.69 (43) 2.68 (68)
3.4L Xtra Cab 1.69 (43) 2.40 (61)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA 4WD)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997
RZN161L-TRMDKAB 1.89 (48) 1.50 (38)
RZN161L-TRPDKAB 1.89 (48) 1.50 (38)
VZN160L-TRMDKAB 1.89 (48) 1.50 (38)
RZN171L-CRMDKAB 1.73 (44) 1.34 (34)
RZN171L-CRPDKAB 1.73 (44) 1.34 (34)
VZN170L-CRMDKAB 1.73 (44) 1.38 (35)
VZN170L-CRPDKAB 1.73 (44) 1.38 (35)
VZN170L-CRMGKAB 1.73 (44) 1.34 (34)
VZN170L-CRPGKAB 1.73 (44) 1.34 (34)
1998
2.7L Reg Cab 1.90 (49) 1.38 (35)
2.7L Xtra Cab 1.89 (48) 1.89 (48)
3.4L Xtra Cab 1.89 (48) 1.97 (50)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (T100 2WD)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997-98
RCK10L-TRMRKA
P215/75R15 1.79 (45.4) 2.40 (60.9)
P235/75R15 1.79 (45.4) 2.36 (59.9)
RCK10L-TRSRKA
P215/75R15 1.79 (45.4) 2.43 (61.8)
P235/75R15 1.79 (45.4) 2.40 (60.9)
VCK11L-TRMDKA
P215/75R15 1.89 (48.0) 2.43 (61.8)
P235/75R15 1.89 (48.0) 2.39 (60.7)
VCK11L-THMDKA
1-Ton 1.94 (49.3) 1.37 (34.9)
VCK11L-TRSDKA
P215/75R15 1.97 (49.9) 2.48 (62.9)
P235/75R15 1.97 (49.9) 2.44 (62.0)
VCK11L-THSDKA
1-Ton 1.97 (49.9) 1.41 (35.7)
VCK11L-CRMDKA
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

P215/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.78 (45.3)


P235/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.77 (44.3)
VCK11L-CRMSKA
P235/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.80 (45.6)
VCK11L-CRSDKA
P215/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.82 (46.2)
P235/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.78 (45.3)
VCK11L-CRSSKA
P235/75R15 1.53 (38.8) 1.83 (46.5)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (T100 4WD)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997-98
VCK21L-TRMDKA
P235/75R15 1.52 (38.5) 2.85 (72.3)
P265/75R16 1.52 (38.5) 2.91 (74.0)
VCK21L-TRSDKA
P235/75R15 1.58 (40.2) 2.80 (71.1)
P265/75R16 1.58 (40.2) 2.87 (72.8)
VCK21L-CRMKA
P235/75R15 1.28 (32.5) 3.13 (79.4)
P265/75R16 1.28 (32.5) 3.21 (81.6)
VCK21L-CRSKA
P235/75R15 1.28 (32.5) 3.08 (78.3)
P265/75R16 1.28 (32.5) 3.17 (80.6)

RIDING HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (4RUNNER)


Application Front: In. (mm) Rear: In. (mm)
1997-98
P225/75R15 2.74 (69.6) 1.95 (49.6)
P265/70R16 1.87 (47.5) 1.16 (29.4)

JACKING & HOISTING


FLOOR JACK

Avalon, Camry, Celica & Corolla

To raise vehicle front, place floor jack under center of front longitudinal engine crossmember. For vehicle rear,
place floor jack under rear suspension crossmember.

Land Cruiser/LX470

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Place floor jack under front and/or rear differential to raise vehicle.

RAV4

To raise vehicle, place floor jack under front undercover support and/or rear suspension crossmember.

Paseo & Tercel

To raise vehicle, place floor jack under front crossmember and/or center of rear axle beam.

Previa, Sienna, Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner

To raise vehicle, place floor jack under front crossmember and/or rear axle housing/differential.

Supra

To raise vehicle, place floor jack under front suspension crossmember and/or rear differential carrier.

EMERGENCY JACKING

Avalon, Camry, Celica, Corolla, Paseo, RAV4, Supra & Tercel

Place emergency jack on reinforced support points of side body panel (between front and rear wheels). Safety
stands may also be placed at these points. See Fig. 3 .

Land Cruiser/LX470

To raise vehicle, place emergency jack under front and/or rear axle.

Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner

Place emergency jack under front suspension crossmember and/or rear axle housing/differential.

Sienna

To raise vehicle, place emergency jack under frame support points between front and/or rear wheels.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 3: Identifying Jacking & Hoisting Support Points (Typical)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

LIFTING VEHICLE WITH HOIST

Avalon, Camry, Celica, Corolla, Paseo, RAV4, Supra & Tercel

Place lift blocks on reinforced support points of side body panel (between front and rear wheels). Safety stands
may also be placed at these points. See Fig. 3 .

Land Cruiser/LX470

Place lift blocks under front and rear axles to raise vehicle.

Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

On 2WD models, place lift blocks under frame side rail and rear axle housing to raise vehicle. On 4WD models,
place lift blocks under front suspension crossmember and rear axle housing to raise vehicle.

Previa & Sienna

Place lift blocks under frame side rail supports.

ADJUSTMENTS
TURNING ANGLE

On Land Cruiser/LX470, Previa, T100 and 4Runner, remove steering knuckle stopper bolt caps. On all models,
turn steering wheel fully right and then left, and observe turning radius on both wheels. If turning radius is
incorrect, inspect and replace any damaged or worn front suspension components. See ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS .

CAMBER ADJUSTMENT

Front Suspension (Avalon, Camry, Celica, Corolla, Land

Cruiser, Paseo, Previa, RAV4, Sienna & Tercel)

1) Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Inspect front wheel bearings for looseness. Check wheel runout.
Wheel runout should not exceed .039" (1.0 mm) on Avalon, Camry, Celica, Corolla and RAV4, .055" (1.4 mm)
on Paseo, Previa and Tercel, or .118" (3.0 mm) on Land Cruiser/LX470.

2) Inspect front suspension components for looseness. Ensure front shock absorbers work properly. Measure
vehicle riding height. See RIDING HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT .

3) Measure camber of both front wheels. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . If camber is not within
specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn front suspension components. Camber is not adjustable
on all models listed except Sienna. On Sienna, loosen lower strut mounting bolts and move steering knuckle
until camber is within specification. Tighten bolts to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

Front Suspension (Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner)

1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Inspect front wheel bearings for looseness. Check wheel
runout. Wheel runout should not exceed .118" (3.0 mm).
2. Inspect front suspension components for looseness. Ensure front shock absorbers work properly. Measure
vehicle riding height. See RIDING HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT .
3. Measure camber of both front wheels. If camber is not within specification, add or remove shims on
upper suspension arms on 2WD models. On 4WD models, loosen and rotate adjuster cams. See
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . See Fig. 4 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 4: Adjusting Front Camber & Caster (T100 & 4Runner Shown; Tacoma Is Similar)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Front Suspension (Supra)

1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Inspect front wheel bearings for looseness. Check wheel
runout. Wheel runout should not exceed .055" (1.4 mm).
2. Inspect front suspension components for looseness. Ensure front shock absorbers work properly. Measure
vehicle riding height. See RIDING HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT .
3. Measure camber of both front wheels. If camber is not within specification, remove engine undercover.
Remove front lower arm bracket strut. Loosen adjuster cam lock nuts. Rotate adjuster cams as necessary.
See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . See Fig. 5 . Tighten lock nuts to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .

Fig. 5: Adjusting Front Camber & Caster (Supra)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Rear Suspension (Avalon, Camry, Celica & Corolla)

Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Measure camber of both rear wheels. See ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS . If camber is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear
suspension components. Camber is not adjustable.

Rear Suspension (RAV4)

Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check camber of both rear wheels. See ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS . If camber is not within specification, adjust camber by rotating adjuster cams.

Rear Suspension (Supra)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Ensure lengths of left and right No. 1 and No. 2 lower suspension
arms are equal. See Fig. 6 . Check camber of both rear wheels. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . If
camber is not within specification, adjust camber by rotating adjuster cams.

Fig. 6: Identifying Rear Camber & Toe Adjuster Cams (Supra)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CASTER ADJUSTMENT

Front Suspension (Avalon, Camry, Celica, Corolla, Land

Cruiser, Paseo, Previa, RAV4, Sienna & Tercel)

Measure caster of both front wheels. If caster is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or
worn front suspension components. Caster is not adjustable.

Front Suspension (Tacoma, T100 & 4Runner)

1. Measure riding height, camber, and steering axis inclination. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS .
If adjustment is necessary, see appropriate adjustment procedure.
2. Measure caster of both front wheels. If caster is not within specification, add or remove shims on upper
control arms on 2WD models. On T100 2WD, adjust shim thickness between front and rear locations to
within .16" (4 mm). If measurement cannot be met, adjust strut rod length by adjusting strut rod nuts. See
Fig. 7 . On 4WD models, loosen and rotate adjuster cams. See Fig. 4 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 7: Identifying Caster Adjuster Nut (T100 2WD)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Front Suspension (Supra)

1. Measure riding height, camber, and steering axis inclination. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS .
If adjustment is necessary, see appropriate adjustment procedure.
2. Measure caster of both front wheels. If caster is not within specification, remove engine undercover.
Remove front lower arm bracket strut. Loosen adjuster cam lock nuts. Rotate adjuster cams as necessary.
See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . See Fig. 5 . Tighten lock nuts to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .

STEERING AXIS/KING PIN INCLINATION

Except Supra

Measure riding height and camber. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . If adjustment is necessary, see
appropriate adjustment procedure. Measure steering axis inclination of both front wheels. If steering axis
inclination is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn front suspension components.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . Steering axis/king pin inclination is not adjustable.

Supra

Measure riding height, camber, and caster. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . If adjustment is
necessary, see appropriate adjustment procedure. Measure steering axis inclination of both front wheels. If
steering axis inclination is not within specification, inspect wheel bearing for looseness, or replace steering
knuckle. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . Steering axis/king pin inclination is not adjustable.

TOE-IN ADJUSTMENT

Front Suspension

Measure riding height, camber, steering axis inclination, and caster. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS .
If adjustment is necessary, see appropriate adjustment procedure. Set front wheels to straight-ahead position.
Bounce both ends of vehicle several times to settle suspension. Measure toe-in. If necessary, adjust toe-in by
changing length of tie rods.

Rear Suspension (Avalon, Camry, Celica & Corolla)

1. Measure rear camber. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . If adjustment is necessary, see


appropriate adjustment procedure.
2. Bounce both ends of vehicle several times to settle suspension. Measure length of left and right No. 2
suspension arms. See Fig. 8 . Ensure lengths of both arms are equal within .039" (1.0 mm).
3. If toe-in is not within specification, adjust toe-in by rotating rear toe adjuster sleeves, located on No. 2
suspension arms. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . Tighten lock nuts to specification after
adjustment. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 14 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Fig. 8: No. 2 Suspension Arm (Avalon, Camry, Celica & Corolla)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Rear Suspension (Land Cruiser/LX470, Paseo, Previa, Sienna,

Tercel, T100 & 4Runner)

Measure rear wheel toe-in. If toe-in is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn
suspension components. See ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . Rear toe-in is not adjustable.

Rear Suspension (Supra)

1. Measure rear camber. See CAMBER ADJUSTMENT under ADJUSTMENTS. Bounce both ends of
vehicle several times to settle suspension.
2. Measure toe-in. If toe-in is not within specification, adjust by rotating adjuster cams. See ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS . See Fig. 6 .

ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS
AVALON

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 15 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (AVALON)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.62 -1.37 To 0.13
Rear -0.77 -1.52 To -0.02
Caster (1)
Front 2.18 1.43 To 2.93
Rear N/A N/A
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 13.07 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To 0.08
(-2 To 2)
Rear 0.16 (4) 0.08 To 0.24
(2 To 6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.78 N/A
Outer 31.42 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

CAMRY

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (CAMRY)


Application Preferred Range
4-Cylinder
Camber (1)
Front -0.6 -1.35 To
0.15
Rear -0.7 -1.45 To
0.05
Caster (1)
Front 2.17 1.42 To
2.92
Rear N/A N/A
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 13.02 N/A
Toe-In (2)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 16 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Front 0 (0) -0.08 To


0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.16 (4) 0.08 To
0.24 (2 To
6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1) (3)
Inner 37.20 N/A
Outer 32.35 N/A
V6
Camber (1)
Front -0.62 -1.37 To
0.13
Rear -0.75 -1.5 To 0
Caster (1)
Front 2.18 1.43 To
2.93
Rear N/A N/A
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 13.7 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.16 (4) 0.08 To
0.24 (2 To
6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1) (3)
Inner 37.20 N/A
Outer 32.35 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

(3) If vehicle is equipped with P205/65R15 tires, inner is 35.78 degrees, outer is 31.42 degrees.

CELICA
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 17 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (CELICA)


Application Preferred Range
1.8L
Camber (1)
Front -0.85 -1.6 To -0.1
Rear -1.27 -2.02 To
0.52
Caster (1) 2.12 1.37 To 2.87
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 15.1 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.14 (3.5) 0.06 To
0.22 (1.5 To
5.5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.35 0.15 To
0.55
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 36.73 N/A
Outer 30.63 N/A
2.2L
Camber (1)
Front -0.77 -1.52 To -
0.02
Rear -1.17 -1.92 To
0.42
Caster (1) 2.08 1.33 To 2.83
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 14.97 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.14 (3.5) 0.06 To
0.22 (1.5 To
5.5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.35 0.15 To
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 18 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

0.55
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 36.9 N/A
Outer 30.73 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

COROLLA

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (COROLLA)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.18 -0.93 To 0.57
Rear -0.92 -1.67 To 0.17
Caster (1) 1.32 0.57 To 2.07
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.63 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0.04 (1) -0.04 To 0.12
(-1 To 3)
Rear 0.16 (3) 0.08 To 0.24
(2 To 6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0.10 -0.1 To 0.3
Rear 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1) (3)
Inner 39.22 N/A
Outer 33.37 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

(3) If vehicle is equipped with manual steering, inner is 39.02 degrees, outer is 33.37 degrees.

LAND CRUISER/LX470

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (LAND CRUISER/LX470)


Application Preferred Range
1997
Camber (1)
Front 1 0.25 To

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 19 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

1.75
Caster (1) 3 2 To 4
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 13 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0.04 To 0.12
(1 To 3)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0.1 To 0.3
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.5 N/A
Outer 31 N/A
1998
Camber (1)
Front .08 -0.67 To
0.83
Caster (1) 2.5 1.75 To 3.25
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.17 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.04 (1) -0.04 To 0.12
(-1 To 3)
Toe-In (1) 0.1 -0.1 To 0.3
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.2 N/A
Outer 32.6 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

PASEO

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (PASEO)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.42 -1.17 To 0.33
Rear -0.5 -1.25 To 0.25
Caster (1) 1.5 0.75 To 2.25
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.25 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0.04 (1) -0.04 To 0.12
(-1 To 3)
Rear 0.13 (3) 0 To 0.26 (0
To 7)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 20 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Toe-In (1)
Front 0.1 -0.1 To 0.3
Rear 0.33 0 To 0.66
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.75 N/A
Outer 32.08 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

PREVIA

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (PREVIA)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1) 0.08 -0.42 To 0.58
Caster (1) 5.5 5 To 6
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.58 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0 To 0.16 (0 To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.16 0 To 0.32
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.58 N/A
Outer 32.75 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

RAV4 - 2-DOOR 2WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (RAV4 - 2 DOOR 2WD)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To 0.42
Rear
2-Door -1.33 -2.08 To -
0.58
4-Door -1.25 -2 To -0.5
Caster (1) 1.42 0.67 To 2.17
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 11.0 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To 0.08
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 21 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

(-2 To 2)
Rear
2-Door 0.16 (4) 0.08 To
0.24 (2 To
6)
4-Door 0.12 (3) 0.04 To 0.2
(1 To 5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear
2-Door 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
4-Door 0.3 0.1 To 0.5
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.25 N/A
Outer 28.08 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

RAV4 - 4-DOOR 2WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (RAV4 - 4 DOOR 2WD)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To 0.42
Rear
2-Door -1.33 -2.08 To -
0.58
4-Door -1.25 -2 To -0.5
Caster (1) 1.42 0.67 To 2.17
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 11.0 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To 0.08
(-2 To 2)
Rear
2-Door 0.16 (4) 0.08 To
0.24 (2 To
6)
4-Door 0.12 (3) 0.04 To 0.2
(1 To 5)
Toe-In (1)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:37 AM Page 22 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2


Rear
2-Door 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
4-Door 0.3 0.1 To 0.5
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.25 N/A
Outer 28.08 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

RAV4 - 2-DOOR 4WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (RAV4 - 2-DOOR 4WD)


Application Preferred Range
215/70R16
Camber (1)
Front -0.25 -1.0 To 0.5
Rear -1.08 -1.83 To -
0.33
Caster (1) 1.33 0.58 To 2.08
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.75 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0.04 To 0.2
(1 To 5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.3 0.1 To 0.5
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.25 N/A
Outer 28.08 N/A
235/60R16
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To
0.42
Rear -1.42 -2.17 To -
0.67
1.42 0.67 To 2.17
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 23 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Caster (1)
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 11 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.16 (4) 0.08 To
0.24 (2 To
6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.4 0.2 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.25 N/A
Outer 28.08 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

RAV4 - 4-DOOR 4WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (RAV4 - 4-DOOR 4WD)


Application Preferred Range
215/70R16
Camber (1)
Front -0.25 -1.0 To 0.5
Rear -0.92 -1.67 To -
0.17
Caster (1) 1.33 0.58 To 2.08
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.75 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0.04 To 0.2
(1 To 5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.3 0.1 To 0.5
Toe-Out On Turns (1)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 24 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Inner 33.25 N/A


Outer 28.08 N/A
235/60R16
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To
0.42
Rear -1.33 -2.08 To -
0.58
Caster (1) 1.42 0.67 To 2.17
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 11 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.08 To
0.08 (-2 To
2)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0.4 To 0.2
(1 To 5)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.2 To 0.2
Rear 0.3 0.1 To 0.5
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.25 N/A
Outer 28.08 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

SIENNA

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (SIENNA)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.53 -1.28 To 0.22
Rear -0.92 -1.67 To -0.17
Caster (1) 1.53 0.78 To 2.28
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.58 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0.1 (2.5) .02 To .18 (.5
To 4.5)
Rear 0.09 (2) -.03 To .21 (-1
To 5)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 25 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Toe-In (1)
Front 27 0.07 To 0.47
Rear 0.22 -0.8 To 0.52
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 34.32 N/A
Outer 30.32 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

SUPRA

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (SUPRA)


Application Preferred Range
Non-Turbo
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To 0.4
Rear -1.58 -2.08 To -
1.08
Caster (1) 3.33 2.83 To 3.83
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 9.58 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.04 To
0.04 (-1 To
1)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0.08 To
0.16 (2 To
4)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.1 To 0.1
Rear 0.3 0.2 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35 N/A
Outer 30.75 N/A
Turbo
Camber (1)
Front -0.5 -1 To 0
Rear -1.5 -2 To -1
Caster (1) 3.5 3 To 4
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 9.75 N/A
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 26 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -0.04 To
0.04 (-1 To
1)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0.08 To
0.16 (2 To
4)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -0.1 To 0.1
Rear 0.3 0.2 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 34.92 N/A
Outer 30.58 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

TACOMA - 2WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA - 2WD)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1) 0.08 -0.67 To 0.83
Caster (1)
2.4L Reg Cab .58 0.17 To 1.33
2.4L Xtra Cab .83 0.08 To 1.58
3.4L Xtra Cab .67 -0.08 To 1.42
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) -0 To 0.16 (0 To
4)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 36 N/A
Outer 31 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

TACOMA - 4WD

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (TACOMA - 4WD)


Application Preferred Range
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 27 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

1997
Camber (1)
2.7L Reg Cab 0.25 -0.5 To 1
3.4L Reg Cab 0.25 -0.5 To 1
2.7L Xtra Cab 0.33 -0.42 To
1.08
3.4L Xtra Cab 0.33 -0.42 To
1.08
Caster (1)
2.7L Reg Cab 1.58 0.83 To
2.33
3.4L Reg Cab 1.58 0.83 To
2.33
2.7L Xtra Cab 1.75 1 To 2.5
3.4L Xtra Cab 1.75 1 To 2.5
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.5 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0 To 0.16 (0
To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 37.5 N/A
Outer 32.5 N/A
1998
Camber (1)
2.7L Reg Cab 0.17 -0.58 To 1
2.7L Xtra Cab 0.25 -0.5 To 1
3.4L Xtra Cab 0.25 -0.5 To 1
Caster (1)
2.7L Reg Cab 1.67 0.92 To
2.42
2.7L Xtra Cab 1.5 .75 To 2.25
3.4L Xtra Cab 1.42 0.67 To
2.17
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.5 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0 To 0.16 (0
To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 37.33 N/A
Outer 32.64 N/A
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 28 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

TERCEL

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (TERCEL)


Application Preferred Range
Camber (1)
Front -0.33 -1.08 To 0.42
Rear -0.5 -1.25 To 0.25
Caster (1) 1.33 0.58 To 2.08
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.17 N/A
Toe-In (2)
Front 0.04 (1) -0.04 To 0.12
(-1 To 3)
Rear 0.12 (3) 0 To 0.24 (0
To 6)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0.1 -0.1 To 0.3
Rear 0.3 0 To 0.6
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35.92 N/A
Outer 32.17 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

T100 - REGULAR CAB

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (T100 - REGULAR CAB)


Application Preferred Range
2WD
Camber (1) 0.4 -0.35 To 1.15
Caster (1) 2.4 1.65 To 3.15
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12.08 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.09 (2.5) -0.01 To 0.19
(-0.5 To 4.5)
Toe-In (1) 0.18 -0.02 To 0.38
Toe-Out On Turns (1)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 29 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Inner 40.67 N/A


Outer 35.1 N/A
4WD
Camber (1) 0.67 -0.08 To 1.42
Caster (1) 1.08 0.33 To 1.83
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.1 (2.5) 0 To 0.2 (0 To
5)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 32.75 N/A
Outer 30.52 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

T100 - XTRA CAB

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (T100 - XTRA CAB)


Application Preferred Range
2WD
Camber (1) .47 -0.28 To 1.22
Caster (1) 2.07 1.32 To 2.82
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.17 (4) 0.07 To 0.27
(1.5 To 7)
Toe-In (1) 0.33 0.13 To 0.53
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 40.8 N/A
Outer 35.68 N/A
4WD
Camber (1) 0.58 -0.17 To 1.33
Caster (1) 0.92 0.17 To 1.67
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 12 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.07 (2) -0.03 To 0.17
(-1 To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.13 -0.07 To 0.33
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 33.12 N/A
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 30 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Outer 30.52 N/A


(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

4RUNNER

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS (4RUNNER)


Application Preferred Range
2WD
Camber (1) -0.25 -1 To 0.5
Caster (1) 3.08 2.33 To 3.83
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 11 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0 To 0.16 (0
To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 35 N/A
Outer 31 N/A
4WD
Camber (1) 0.17 -0.58 To 0.92
Caster (1) 2.42 1.67 To 3.17
Steering Axis Inclination (1) 10.58 N/A
Toe-In (2) 0.08 (2) 0 To 0.16 (0
To 4)
Toe-In (1) 0.2 0 To 0.4
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 36 N/A
Outer 32 N/A
(1) Measurement in degrees.

(2) Measurement in inches (mm).

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (CARS)
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Avalon & Camry
Rear Toe Adjuster Sleeve Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 55 (75)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 31 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)


Celica
Rear Toe Adjuster Sleeve Lock Nuts 55 (75)
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
Corolla
Rear Toe Adjuster Sleeve Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
Paseo & Tercel
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 35 (47)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
Supra
Front Adjuster Cam Lock Nuts 167 (226)
Rear Adjuster Cam Lock Nuts 136 (184)
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (LIGHT TRUCKS)


Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Land Cruiser/LX470
Steering Knuckle Stopper Bolts 32 (44)
Tie Rod Clamp Nuts 27 (37)
Wheel Lug Nuts
Aluminum Wheel 76 (103)
Steel Wheel 108 (147)
Previa & Sienna
Lower Strut Mounting Bolts 155 (210)
Steering Knuckle Stopper Bolts 24 (33)
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 67 (91)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
RAV4
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
T100 2WD
Tie Rod Lock Nuts 41 (56)
Upper Control Arm Bolts 71 (96)
Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
T100 4WD
Front Suspension Adjuster Cams 167 (226)
Steering Knuckle Stopper Bolts 35 (47)
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 32 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1998 Lexus LX 470
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS & PROCEDURES 1997-98 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Toyota - Specifications &
Procedures

Tie Rod Clamp Nuts 16 (22)


Wheel Lug Nuts 76 (103)
4Runner
Front Suspension Adjuster Cams 96 (130)
Tie Rod Clamp Nuts 41 (55)
Wheel Lug Nuts 81 (110)

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 8:43:38 AM Page 33 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM

1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

NOTE: This article also applies to Lexus LX450. Refer to Land Cruiser, unless
otherwise indicated.

WARNING: Deactivate air bag system before performing any service operation. See
appropriate article:

 For Land Cruiser, see AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM .


 For Lexus LX450, see AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM .

WARNING: DO NOT apply electrical power to any component on steering column


without first deactivating air bag system. Air bag may deploy.

Vehicles are equipped with 2-speed wiper motors. An intermittent wiper system is optional. Front wiper motors
are protected by an internal circuit breaker. Vehicles are equipped with rear wipers.

COMPONENT TESTING
FRONT WIPER MOTOR TEST

1. Using 12-volt battery, connect jumper wire from positive battery terminal to wiper motor terminal No. 3.
See Fig. 1 . Connect another jumper wire between negative battery terminal and wiper motor terminal
No. 1. Motor should operate at low speed.
2. Remove jumper wire from terminal No. 3. Reconnect positive battery terminal jumper wire to wiper
motor terminal No. 2. Motor should operate at high speed.
3. Remove jumper wire from terminal No. 2 and reconnect jumper wire to wiper motor terminal No. 3. With
motor running at low speed, stop motor at any position except PARK position by disconnecting jumper
wire from terminal No. 3. Install another jumper wire between wiper motor terminals No. 3 and 5.
4. Ensure motor terminal No. 1 (ground terminal) is still connected to battery negative terminal. Connect
positive battery terminal jumper wire to wiper motor terminal No. 6. Motor should start running and then
stop at the PARK position. Replace motor if operation is not as described.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:16
1:41:13 PM Page 1 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 1: Identifying Front Wiper Motor Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FRONT WIPER SWITCH TEST

With wiper switch in specified position, ensure continuity exists between specified terminals. See WIPER
SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST table. See Fig. 2 . Replace wiper switch assembly if continuity is not as
specified.

WIPER SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST


Switch Position (1) Terminals

Off B4 & B7
Intermittent B4 & B7
Low B7 & B18
High B13 & B18
(1) See Fig. 2 .

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 2 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 2: Identifying Combination Switch Connectors For Wipers


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FRONT WASHER SWITCH TEST

With washer switch in specified position, ensure continuity exists between specified terminals. See WASHER
SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST table. See Fig. 2 . Replace complete wiper switch assembly if continuity is
not as specified.

WASHER SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST


Switch Position (1) Terminals Continuity
Off B8 & B16 No
On B8 & B16 Yes
(1) See Fig. 2 .

REAR WIPER MOTOR TEST

1. Disconnect wiring connector from wiper motor. Using 12-volt battery, connect jumper wire from positive
battery terminal to wiper motor terminal No. 3. See Fig. 3 . Using another jumper wire, connect wiper
motor terminal No. 2 to negative battery terminal. Motor should operate.
2. To check automatic PARK operation, with motor running, stop motor operation anywhere except PARK
position by removing power from terminal No. 3. Install another jumper wire between terminals No. 3
and 4. Connect jumper wire from positive battery terminal to wiper motor terminal No. 1. Ensure motor
operates and stops at PARK position. Replace motor if operation is not as described.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 3 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 3: Identifying Rear Wiper Motor Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REAR WIPER RELAY TEST

NOTE: For relay locations, see REAR WIPER RELAY LOCATION table.

Using an ohmmeter, check continuity between relay terminals No. 1 and 3. See Fig. 4 . No continuity should
exist. Connect ohmmeter leads to relay terminals No. 2 and 3. Continuity should exist. If continuity is not as
described, replace relay.

REAR WIPER RELAY LOCATION


Model Location
Land Cruiser Inside Back Door, To Left Of Motor

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 4 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 4: Identifying Rear Wiper Relay Terminals


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REAR WIPER SWITCH TEST

With wiper switch in specified position, ensure continuity exists between specified terminals. See REAR
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST table. See Fig. 2 . Replace complete wiper switch if
continuity is not as specified.

REAR WIPER/WASHER SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST


Switch Position (1) Terminals Continuity
Off B1, B2, B10 & B16 No
Intermittent B10 & B16 Yes
On B1 & B16 Yes
Wash
W/Wiper On B2 & B16 Yes
W/Intermittent On B1, B2 & B16 Yes
(1) See Fig. 2 .

REMOVAL & INSTALLATION

WARNING: Deactivate air bag system before performing any service operation. See
appropriate article:

 For Land Cruiser, see AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM .


Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 5 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

 For Lexus LX450, see AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM .

WARNING: DO NOT apply electrical power to any component on steering column


without first deactivating air bag system. Air bag may deploy.

FRONT WIPER SWITCH

NOTE: Wiper switch is component of combination switch, mounted to steering column.


For further information on combination switch removal procedure, see
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.

Removal

1. Disconnect negative battery cable. To access combination switch connector, remove instrument panel
lower finish panel under steering column. See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER under REMOVAL &
INSTALLATION in INSTRUMENT PANEL article. Remove steering column upper and lower covers.
Remove steering wheel. See STEERING WHEEL .
2. Locate wiper/washer switch wire terminal positions installed into combination switch harness connector.
See Fig. 2 . Lift tab locks on combination switch connector. See Fig. 5 .
3. Using miniature screwdriver, release wire terminal securing tab inside connector. See Fig. 5 . Pull wire(s)
from connector and through harness jacket tubing. Remove wiper switch retaining screws from rear of
combination switch body and remove switch. See Fig. 6 .

Installation

To install, reverse removal procedure. When installing wiper switch wire terminals to harness connector, push
inward on wire terminal until terminal clicks into place.

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 6 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 5: Releasing Wire Terminal Inside Combination Connector


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 6: Identifying Combination Switch Components


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

REAR WIPER SWITCH

Removal & Installation

Switch is integral part of wiper switch mounted to combination switch on steering column. See FRONT
WIPER SWITCH .

STEERING WHEEL

Removal

1. Ensure front wheels are in straight-ahead position. Place ignition switch in LOCK position and remove
key. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove 2 screw covers from outer sides of steering wheel. Using
Torx Wrench (T30), loosen air bag pad retaining Torx screws until screw heads are snug against screw
case. See Fig. 7 .
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 7 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

2. Carefully pull air bag pad away from steering wheel enough to unlock and disconnect air bag electrical
connector. DO NOT pull on electrical connector or wiring. Store air bag pad aside with pad facing
upward.
3. Remove steering wheel lock nut and washer from steering shaft. Make alignment mark on steering shaft
and steering wheel for installation reference. Using appropriate steering wheel puller, pull steering wheel
from shaft while guiding spiral cable wire through steering wheel opening.

Installation

1. Ensure front wheels are in straight-ahead position. Connect and install spiral cable to combination switch.
Turn spiral cable counterclockwise by hand until it is hard to turn. Turn spiral cable clockwise about 2
1/2-3 turns and align Red mark at bottom with opening.
2. Guide spiral cable through steering wheel opening while installing steering wheel to shaft. Align
reference marks on steering shaft and steering wheel. Install steering wheel lock nut and washer. Tighten
steering wheel lock nut to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m).
3. Connect air bag electrical connector and snap down connector lock. Before installing air bag pad, ensure
Torx screws are retracted and snug against screw case. See Fig. 7 .
4. Install air bag pad to steering wheel ensuring all wiring is NOT pinched and DOES NOT interfere with
moving parts. Tighten 4 Torx screws to 78 INCH lbs. (8.8 N.m). Install screw covers. Connect negative
battery cable.

Fig. 7: Removing Air Bag From Steering Wheel (Typical)


Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 8 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 9 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 10 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 8: Front Wiper/Washer System Wiring Diagram

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 11 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 12 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
1997 Lexus LX 450
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 1997 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Toyota - Wiper/Washer Systems

Fig. 9: Rear Wiper/Washer System Wiring Diagram

Microsoft
Thursday, August 27, 2009 1:41:13 PM Page 13 © 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.

You might also like